Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 30650:db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
| author | Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Mon, 07 Aug 2000 15:43:46 +0000 |
| parents | e53905a0a16b |
| children | fc3acf3f8131 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 27200 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000 |
| 2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
| 25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
| 4 | |
| 5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
| 6 For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
| 7 | |
| 8 | |
| 25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
| 10 | |
| 30576 | 11 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
| 12 | |
| 28166 | 13 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
| 14 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
| 15 | |
| 16 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
|
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
17 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
|
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
18 to list them. |
| 29696 | 19 |
| 29972 | 20 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
| 21 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if they these are available. | |
|
30467
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
22 |
|
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
23 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
|
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
24 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. |
|
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
25 |
|
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
26 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
|
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
27 support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. |
| 30576 | 28 |
| 28166 | 29 |
| 30 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 | |
| 31 | |
|
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
32 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
33 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
34 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
35 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
36 |
| 30222 | 37 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains |
| 38 a version-dependent component. | |
| 39 | |
| 30155 | 40 ** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default. |
| 41 Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs | |
| 42 will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This | |
| 43 character is still bound as before. | |
| 44 | |
| 29752 | 45 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set |
| 46 using that menu. | |
| 47 | |
|
29532
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
48 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
|
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
49 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod. |
|
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
50 |
| 29509 | 51 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
| 52 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
| 53 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
| 54 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
| 55 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
| 56 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
| 57 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
| 58 | |
| 30296 | 59 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
| 60 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
| 61 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
| 62 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
| 63 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
| 30357 | 64 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
| 30296 | 65 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
| 30357 | 66 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
| 67 RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
| 30205 | 68 |
| 29506 | 69 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
| 70 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
| 71 | |
| 72 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at | |
| 73 point in a pop-up window. | |
| 74 | |
| 75 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and | |
| 76 displays all characters in that character set. | |
| 77 | |
| 78 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
| 79 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
| 80 | |
|
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
81 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
|
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
82 on the context. |
|
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
83 |
| 28919 | 84 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
| 85 | |
| 28912 | 86 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
| 87 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
| 88 | |
| 28799 | 89 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
| 90 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
| 91 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
| 92 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
| 93 | |
| 28699 | 94 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
| 95 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
|
28776
49a91eb4274c
Describe the different auto-save-file-list-prefix on MS-DOS.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28759
diff
changeset
|
96 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) |
| 28699 | 97 You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location. |
| 98 | |
| 28695 | 99 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
| 100 on the display using several methods | |
| 101 | |
| 102 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be | |
| 103 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
| 104 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
| 105 | |
| 106 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is | |
| 107 equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter. | |
| 108 | |
| 28870 | 109 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
| 28695 | 110 |
| 111 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
| 112 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
| 113 | |
| 29752 | 114 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
| 28660 | 115 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
| 29752 | 116 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
| 28660 | 117 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
| 28626 | 118 |
|
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
119 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
| 28757 | 120 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
| 121 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
|
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
122 |
| 28396 | 123 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
| 124 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
| 125 | |
| 28159 | 126 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
| 127 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
| 128 this behavior. | |
| 129 | |
| 130 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte | |
| 131 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
| 132 Emacs dump core. | |
| 133 | |
| 134 ** New X resources recognized | |
| 27994 | 135 |
| 28140 | 136 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
| 137 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
| 138 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
| 139 | |
| 140 Example: | |
| 141 | |
| 28159 | 142 emacs.synchronous: true |
| 28140 | 143 |
| 27994 | 144 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
| 145 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
| 27995 | 146 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
| 147 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
| 148 visual class names are | |
| 27994 | 149 |
| 150 TrueColor | |
| 151 PseudoColor | |
| 152 DirectColor | |
| 153 StaticColor | |
| 154 GrayScale | |
| 155 StaticGray | |
| 156 | |
| 157 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
| 158 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
| 159 meaning. | |
| 160 | |
| 27995 | 161 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
| 162 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
| 163 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
| 164 visual. | |
| 165 | |
| 166 Example: | |
| 167 | |
| 28159 | 168 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
| 27994 | 169 |
| 170 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
| 171 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
| 172 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
| 173 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
| 174 | |
| 27995 | 175 Example: |
| 176 | |
| 28159 | 177 emacs.privateColormap: true |
| 27995 | 178 |
|
27966
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
179 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
|
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
180 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
|
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
181 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
|
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
182 |
| 27847 | 183 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to |
| 27845 | 184 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is |
| 27847 | 185 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can |
| 186 be customized. | |
| 27845 | 187 |
| 27770 | 188 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
| 189 | |
| 27473 | 190 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
| 191 all frames except the selected one. | |
| 192 | |
| 27369 | 193 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
| 194 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
| 195 | |
| 27356 | 196 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
|
30482
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
197 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
|
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
198 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus |
|
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
199 displayed by Emacs now have help strings. |
|
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
200 |
|
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
201 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
|
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
202 MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
| 27356 | 203 |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
204 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
205 read mail from the menu etc. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
206 |
| 28658 | 207 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
| 208 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
| 209 | |
| 28626 | 210 ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
| 211 | |
| 212 ** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo | |
| 213 macros | |
| 214 | |
| 215 Key binding Macro | |
| 216 ------------------------- | |
| 217 C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
| 218 C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
| 219 C-c C-c u @url | |
| 220 C-c C-c q @quotation | |
| 221 C-c C-c m @email | |
| 222 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
223 ** Changes in Outline mode. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
224 |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
225 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
226 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
227 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
228 |
| 27200 | 229 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
| 230 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
| 231 | |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
232 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
233 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
234 several other special buffers. |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
235 |
|
26432
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
236 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
237 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
238 .emacs file. |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
239 |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
240 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount' |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
241 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
|
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
242 |
| 26417 | 243 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
| 244 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
| 245 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
| 246 | |
|
26322
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
247 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
248 is running in batch mode. For example, |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
249 |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
250 (message "%s" (read t)) |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
251 |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
252 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
253 to standard output. |
|
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
254 |
| 25853 | 255 ** Faces and frame parameters. |
| 256 | |
| 257 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
| 258 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
| 259 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
| 260 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
| 261 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
| 262 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
| 263 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
| 264 | |
| 265 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
| 266 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
| 26264 | 267 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
| 25853 | 268 `default' face and vice versa. |
| 269 | |
| 25951 | 270 ** New face `menu'. |
| 271 | |
| 272 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
| 273 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
| 274 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
| 275 | |
| 25853 | 276 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
| 277 | |
| 278 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
| 279 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
| 280 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
| 281 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
| 282 | |
| 283 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
| 284 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
| 285 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
| 286 | |
| 287 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
| 288 `ScreenGamma'. | |
| 289 | |
| 290 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
| 291 | |
| 292 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
| 293 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
| 294 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
| 295 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
| 296 the text. | |
| 297 | |
| 298 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
| 299 | |
| 300 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
| 301 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
| 302 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
| 303 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
| 304 specify a font. | |
| 305 | |
| 306 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
| 307 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
| 308 under Lisp changes, below. | |
| 309 | |
| 310 ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | |
| 311 | |
| 312 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | |
| 313 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | |
| 314 it is hollow. | |
| 315 | |
| 316 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
| 317 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
| 318 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
| 319 customizing face `fringe'. | |
| 320 | |
| 321 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | |
| 322 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | |
| 323 | |
| 324 ** LessTif support. | |
| 325 | |
| 326 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | |
| 327 need a version 0.88.1 or later. | |
| 328 | |
| 329 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
| 330 | |
| 331 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
| 332 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
| 333 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
| 334 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
| 335 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
| 336 Emacs. | |
| 337 | |
| 338 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
| 339 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
| 340 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
| 341 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
| 342 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
| 343 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
| 344 | |
| 345 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
| 346 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
| 347 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
| 348 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
| 349 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
| 350 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
| 351 | |
| 352 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
| 353 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
| 354 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
| 355 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
| 356 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
| 357 | |
| 358 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
| 359 | |
| 360 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
| 361 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
| 362 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
| 363 | |
| 364 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
| 365 | |
| 366 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
| 367 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
| 368 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
| 369 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
| 370 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
| 371 whitespace. | |
| 372 | |
| 373 ** Busy-cursor. | |
| 374 | |
| 375 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | |
| 376 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
| 377 | |
| 378 ** Blinking cursor | |
| 379 | |
| 380 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
| 381 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
| 382 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
| 383 the group `cursor'. | |
| 384 | |
| 385 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
| 386 | |
| 387 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
| 388 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
| 389 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
| 390 details. | |
| 391 | |
| 392 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
| 393 have to do anything to activate it. | |
| 394 | |
| 395 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
| 396 | |
| 397 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
| 398 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
| 399 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
| 400 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
| 401 | |
| 402 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
| 403 | |
| 404 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
| 405 | |
| 406 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
| 407 | |
|
28677
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
408 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
409 LessTif/Motif one. |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
410 |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
411 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
|
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
412 LessTif and Motif. |
| 25853 | 413 |
| 414 ** Hscrolling in C code. | |
| 415 | |
| 28695 | 416 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if |
| 417 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
| 418 customized. | |
| 25853 | 419 |
| 420 ** Tool bar support. | |
| 421 | |
| 422 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
| 423 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | |
| 424 | |
| 425 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
| 426 | |
| 427 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
| 428 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
| 429 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
| 430 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
| 431 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
| 432 | |
| 433 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
| 434 | |
| 435 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
| 436 buffers. | |
| 437 | |
| 438 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
| 439 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
| 440 | |
| 441 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
| 442 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
443 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') |
| 25853 | 444 toggles the read-only status. |
| 445 | |
| 446 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | |
| 447 | |
| 448 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
| 449 | |
| 450 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
| 26652 | 451 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
| 25853 | 452 non-nil. |
| 453 | |
| 454 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
| 455 | |
| 456 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
| 457 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
| 458 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
| 459 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
| 460 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
|
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
461 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored |
|
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
462 on terminals. |
| 25853 | 463 |
| 464 ** Sound support | |
| 465 | |
| 30012 | 466 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
|
30121
f67697912c81
Correct a typo ("aka as" -> "a.k.a.").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30111
diff
changeset
|
467 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
| 30012 | 468 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
| 25853 | 469 |
| 470 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
| 471 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
| 472 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
| 473 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
| 474 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
| 475 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
| 476 | |
| 477 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
| 478 | |
| 479 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
| 480 | |
| 481 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
| 482 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
| 483 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
| 484 | |
| 485 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
| 486 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
| 487 | |
| 488 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
| 489 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
| 490 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
| 491 | |
| 492 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
| 493 | |
| 494 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
| 495 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | |
| 496 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
| 497 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
| 498 | |
| 499 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
| 500 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | |
| 501 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
| 502 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
| 503 | |
| 504 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
| 505 notably at the end of lines. | |
| 506 | |
| 507 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
| 508 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
| 509 | |
| 28132 | 510 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle. |
| 511 | |
| 25853 | 512 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
| 513 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
| 514 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
| 515 | |
| 29972 | 516 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
| 517 you edit the replacement string. | |
| 28805 | 518 |
| 519 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's | |
| 520 you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to | |
| 521 lisp-complete-symbol. | |
| 522 | |
| 25853 | 523 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
| 524 | |
|
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
525 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are |
|
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
526 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless |
|
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
527 it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer |
|
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
528 window size by setting the following variable: |
| 25853 | 529 |
| 530 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
| 531 | |
| 532 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
| 533 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
| 534 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | |
| 535 | |
| 536 Default is 0.25. | |
| 537 | |
| 30111 | 538 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
| 539 | |
| 27017 | 540 ** Changes to hideshow.el |
| 541 | |
| 542 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block | |
| 543 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support. | |
| 544 | |
| 545 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
| 546 | |
| 547 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps | |
| 548 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying | |
| 549 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a | |
| 550 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts | |
| 551 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func' | |
| 552 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp'). | |
| 553 | |
| 554 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero, | |
| 555 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is | |
| 556 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see | |
| 557 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details. | |
| 558 | |
| 559 *** Isearch support for updating mode line | |
| 560 | |
| 561 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden | |
| 562 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the | |
| 563 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden | |
| 564 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block | |
| 565 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil. | |
| 566 | |
| 567 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include | |
| 568 something like this in your .emacs. | |
| 569 | |
| 570 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook | |
| 571 (lambda () | |
| 572 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline))) | |
| 573 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
574 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
575 |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
576 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
577 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
578 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
579 |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
580 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
581 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary. |
|
27005
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
582 |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
583 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
584 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
585 |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
586 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
587 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
588 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
589 a file. |
|
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
590 |
|
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
591 ** Changes in Font Lock |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
592 |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
593 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
594 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
595 mode. |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
596 |
| 26606 | 597 ** Comint (subshell) changes |
| 598 | |
|
30650
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
599 By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
600 distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
601 the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
602 attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information. |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
603 Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
604 boundaries in a fairly natural manner. |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
605 To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
606 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value. |
|
db7dfd959c19
Add note about comint field changes (`comint-prompt-regexp removal').
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30576
diff
changeset
|
607 |
| 26606 | 608 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes |
| 609 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
| 610 | |
| 611 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
| 612 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
| 613 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
| 614 | |
| 615 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
| 616 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
| 617 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
| 618 | |
| 30319 | 619 Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and |
| 620 scheme-interaction-mode now highlight user input, and support choosing | |
| 621 previous input with mouse-2. To control this feature, see the | |
| 622 user-option `comint-highlight-input'. | |
| 623 | |
|
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
624 ** Changes to Rmail mode |
|
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
625 |
| 28492 | 626 *** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
| 627 set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when | |
| 628 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the | |
| 629 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
| 630 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
| 631 as correspondent. | |
| 632 | |
| 633 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
| 634 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
| 29162 | 635 regexp matching your mail addresses. |
| 28492 | 636 |
| 28292 | 637 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
| 638 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
| 639 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
| 640 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
| 641 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
| 642 | |
| 27361 | 643 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
| 644 like `j'. | |
| 645 | |
|
27381
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
646 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
|
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
647 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
|
27378
af3075bcc264
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27369
diff
changeset
|
648 digest message. |
|
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
649 |
| 29162 | 650 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
| 651 in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
| 652 | |
| 26271 | 653 ** Changes to TeX mode |
| 654 | |
| 655 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
| 656 `latex-mode'. | |
| 657 | |
| 25853 | 658 ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 659 | |
| 660 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
| 661 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
| 662 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
| 663 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
| 664 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
| 665 can be edited from that buffer. | |
| 666 | |
| 667 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
| 668 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
| 669 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
| 670 | |
| 671 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
| 672 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
| 673 | |
| 674 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
| 675 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
| 676 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
| 677 been cited. | |
| 678 | |
|
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
679 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
680 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
681 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
682 in column 1 are always made leaves. |
|
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
683 |
| 25853 | 684 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
| 685 has the following new features: | |
| 686 | |
| 687 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
| 688 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
| 689 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
| 690 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
| 691 | |
| 692 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
| 693 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
| 694 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
| 695 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
| 696 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
| 697 defaults to 1. | |
| 698 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
699 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
| 29676 | 700 file names. |
| 701 | |
| 25853 | 702 ** Tooltips. |
| 703 | |
| 704 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
| 705 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | |
| 706 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
| 707 | |
| 708 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
| 709 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
| 710 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
| 711 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
| 712 | |
| 713 ** Customize changes | |
| 714 | |
| 715 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
| 26096 | 716 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
| 717 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
| 25853 | 718 |
| 719 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
| 720 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
| 721 default). | |
| 722 | |
|
26834
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
723 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
724 between custom options. Example: |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
725 |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
726 (defcustom default-input-method nil |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
727 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
728 This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
729 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
730 :group 'mule |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
731 :type '(choice (const nil) string) |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
732 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
733 |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
734 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
735 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
736 first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
|
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
737 |
| 25853 | 738 ** New features in evaluation commands |
| 739 | |
| 30056 | 740 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
| 25853 | 741 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
| 742 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
| 743 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
| 744 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
| 745 | |
| 30056 | 746 *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
| 747 code when called with a prefix argument. | |
| 748 | |
| 30564 | 749 ** Ispell changes |
| 750 | |
|
30568
904cda56fa16
Fix typos in the entry for `ispell' command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30565
diff
changeset
|
751 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
|
904cda56fa16
Fix typos in the entry for `ispell' command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30565
diff
changeset
|
752 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it |
| 30564 | 753 spell-checks the current buffer. |
| 754 | |
| 25853 | 755 ** Dired changes |
| 756 | |
| 757 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
| 758 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
| 759 is, delete only empty directories. | |
| 760 | |
| 761 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
| 762 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
| 763 copy directories recursively. | |
| 764 | |
|
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
765 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
766 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
767 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
768 |
| 30111 | 769 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
| 770 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
| 771 directory. | |
| 772 | |
|
30278
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
773 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows |
|
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
774 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
|
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
775 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so |
|
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
776 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as |
|
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
777 accurate or inaccurate as it is. |
|
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
778 |
| 30415 | 779 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
| 780 from ls switches. | |
| 781 | |
| 25853 | 782 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
| 783 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
| 784 | |
| 26820 | 785 ** CC mode changes. |
| 786 | |
| 787 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
| 788 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
| 789 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
| 790 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
| 791 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
| 792 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
| 793 release. | |
| 794 | |
| 30412 | 795 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
| 796 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
| 797 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
| 798 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
| 799 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
| 800 have to bother. | |
| 801 | |
| 802 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
| 803 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
| 30445 | 804 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
| 30412 | 805 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
| 806 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
| 807 by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
| 808 | |
| 26820 | 809 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
| 810 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
| 811 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
| 812 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
| 813 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
| 814 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
| 815 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
| 816 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
| 817 | |
| 818 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
| 819 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
| 820 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
| 821 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
| 822 above. | |
| 823 | |
| 824 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
| 825 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
| 826 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
| 827 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
| 828 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
| 829 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
| 830 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
| 831 function documentation for more info. | |
| 832 | |
| 833 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
| 834 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
| 835 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
| 836 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
| 837 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
| 838 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
| 839 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
| 840 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
| 841 | |
| 842 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
| 843 | |
| 844 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
| 845 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
| 846 | |
| 847 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
| 848 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
| 849 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
| 850 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
| 851 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
| 852 style system. | |
| 853 | |
| 854 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
| 855 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
| 856 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
| 857 as far as possible. | |
| 858 | |
| 859 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
| 860 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
| 861 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
| 862 chapter about this in the manual. | |
| 863 | |
| 864 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
| 865 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
| 866 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
| 867 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
| 868 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
| 869 | |
| 870 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
| 871 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
| 872 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
| 873 | |
| 874 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
| 875 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
| 876 | |
| 877 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
| 878 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
| 879 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
| 880 inside CC Mode. | |
| 881 | |
| 882 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
| 883 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
| 884 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
| 885 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
| 886 cc-mode/). | |
| 887 | |
| 888 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
| 889 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
| 890 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
| 891 literals. | |
| 892 | |
| 893 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
| 894 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
| 895 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
| 896 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
| 897 this function. | |
| 898 | |
| 899 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
| 900 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
| 901 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
| 902 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
| 903 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
| 904 | |
| 905 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
| 906 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
| 907 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
| 908 | |
| 909 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
| 910 | |
| 911 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
| 912 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
| 913 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
| 914 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
| 915 | |
| 916 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
| 917 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
| 918 the column specified by comment-column. | |
| 919 | |
| 920 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
| 921 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
| 922 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
| 923 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
| 924 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
| 925 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
| 926 | |
| 927 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
| 928 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
| 929 arguments. | |
| 930 | |
| 931 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
| 932 | |
| 933 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
| 934 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
| 935 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
| 936 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
| 937 Provan). | |
| 938 | |
| 939 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
| 940 | |
| 28506 | 941 ** Makefile mode changes |
| 942 | |
| 943 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
| 944 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
945 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
| 28506 | 946 Fontlock mode is active. |
| 947 | |
| 26407 | 948 ** Isearch changes |
| 949 | |
| 30477 | 950 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
| 951 so that searches can be resumed. | |
| 952 | |
| 953 *** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, | |
| 28506 | 954 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
| 955 that started the search. | |
| 956 | |
| 26407 | 957 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
| 25853 | 958 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
| 959 | |
| 26407 | 960 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
| 961 | |
| 26417 | 962 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
| 26407 | 963 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
| 964 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
| 965 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
| 966 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
967 `secondary-selection'. |
| 26407 | 968 |
| 969 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
| 970 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
| 971 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
| 972 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
| 973 usual snappy response. | |
| 974 | |
| 975 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
| 976 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
| 977 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
| 978 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
| 979 | |
|
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
980 ** Changes in sort.el |
|
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
981 |
|
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
982 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
|
27533
6dfbe5197843
A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27498
diff
changeset
|
983 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
|
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
984 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default |
|
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
985 numeric base. |
| 26407 | 986 |
| 28194 | 987 ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
| 988 | |
| 989 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file | |
| 25929 | 990 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
| 991 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
| 992 | |
| 28194 | 993 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
| 994 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
| 995 | |
|
30518
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
996 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
|
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
997 output ^M at the end of lines. |
|
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
998 |
| 25984 | 999 ** Shell script mode changes. |
| 1000 | |
| 1001 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
| 1002 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and | |
| 1003 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
| 1004 | |
| 26264 | 1005 ** Etags changes. |
| 1006 | |
| 1007 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
| 1008 | |
|
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1009 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
|
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1010 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1011 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1012 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1013 a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
|
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1014 |
| 26264 | 1015 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
| 1016 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
| 1017 | |
| 1018 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
|
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1019 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
| 26264 | 1020 |
| 1021 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
| 1022 types. | |
| 1023 | |
| 29238 | 1024 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
| 26264 | 1025 |
| 1026 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
| 1027 | |
| 1028 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
| 1029 are now tagged. | |
| 1030 | |
| 1031 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
| 1032 variables are tagged. | |
| 1033 | |
| 1034 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
| 1035 | |
|
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1036 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
|
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potort? <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1037 for PSWrap. |
| 26264 | 1038 |
|
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1039 ** Changes in etags.el |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1040 |
| 28244 | 1041 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
| 1042 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
| 1043 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
| 1044 | |
|
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1045 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1046 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1047 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1048 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1049 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1050 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1051 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1052 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1053 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1054 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1055 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1056 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1057 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1058 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1059 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1060 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1061 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1062 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1063 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1064 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1065 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1066 |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1067 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1068 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
|
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1069 |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1070 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1071 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1072 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1073 |
| 29506 | 1074 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
| 1075 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
| 1076 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
| 1077 There is currently no specific input method support for them. | |
| 26016 | 1078 |
|
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
1079 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
| 26652 | 1080 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
| 1081 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
| 1082 | |
| 1083 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
| 1084 | |
| 26768 | 1085 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
| 1086 | |
| 28492 | 1087 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps' |
| 1088 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular | |
| 1089 expression from that list, are not checked. | |
| 1090 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1091 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
|
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1092 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, |
|
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1093 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert |
|
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1094 the buffer, just like for the local files. |
|
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1095 |
| 25853 | 1096 ** New modes and packages |
| 1097 | |
| 30565 | 1098 *** THe new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered |
| 1099 regexp's can be highlighted. For example, | |
| 1100 | |
| 1101 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET | |
| 1102 | |
| 1103 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
| 1104 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
| 1105 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
| 1106 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
| 1107 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
| 1108 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
| 1109 corresponding file is read. | |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when | |
| 1112 Emacs is idle. | |
| 1113 | |
| 30319 | 1114 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
| 1115 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
| 1116 | |
|
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1117 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
|
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1118 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should |
|
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1119 be more robust while offering the same functionality. |
|
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1120 |
| 28879 | 1121 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
| 1122 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
| 1123 separate Texinfo file. | |
| 1124 | |
|
28854
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1125 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1126 or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1127 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1128 It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1129 used to enter checkin log messages. |
|
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1130 |
| 28834 | 1131 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
| 1132 without invoking external programs. | |
| 1133 | |
| 1134 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
| 1135 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
| 1136 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
| 1137 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
|
28955
6cfd3ddf0911
Correct a typo in description of `woman.el'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28946
diff
changeset
|
1138 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
| 28834 | 1139 |
| 1140 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
| 1141 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
| 1142 | |
| 28098 | 1143 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
| 1144 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
| 1145 | |
| 1146 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
| 1147 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
| 1148 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
| 1149 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
| 1150 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
| 1151 single step. | |
| 1152 | |
| 1153 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
| 1154 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
| 1155 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
| 1156 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
| 1157 | |
| 27644 | 1158 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
| 1159 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
| 1160 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
| 1161 | |
| 27498 | 1162 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
| 1163 PostScript. | |
| 1164 | |
| 1165 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
| 1166 | |
| 1167 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
| 1168 | |
| 1169 ; comment (until end of line) | |
| 1170 A non-terminal | |
| 1171 "C" terminal | |
| 1172 ?C? special | |
| 1173 $A default non-terminal | |
| 1174 $"C" default terminal | |
| 1175 $?C? default special | |
| 1176 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
| 1177 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
| 1178 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
| 1179 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
| 1180 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
| 1181 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
| 1182 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
| 1183 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
| 1184 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
| 1185 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
| 1186 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
| 1187 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
| 1188 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
| 1189 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
| 1190 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
| 1193 | |
| 27328 | 1194 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
| 1195 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
| 1196 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
| 1197 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
| 1198 equal signs of assignments. | |
| 1199 | |
|
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1200 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1201 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
|
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1202 |
| 27016 | 1203 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
| 1204 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
| 1205 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to | |
| 1206 customize the package. | |
| 1207 | |
| 29696 | 1208 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
| 1209 | |
| 27733 | 1210 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
| 1211 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
| 1212 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
| 1213 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
| 1214 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
| 1215 which answers different needs. | |
| 1216 | |
|
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1217 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1218 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1219 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1220 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1221 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1222 to be enabled. |
|
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1223 |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1224 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1225 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1226 |
| 25853 | 1227 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
| 1228 | |
| 1229 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | |
| 1230 | |
| 1231 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
| 1232 | |
| 1233 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
| 1234 Pascal) language. | |
| 1235 | |
| 1236 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
| 1237 the text at point. | |
| 1238 | |
| 1239 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
| 1240 | |
| 25862 | 1241 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
| 1242 | |
| 25853 | 1243 *** whitespace.el ??? |
| 1244 | |
| 25992 | 1245 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
| 1246 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
| 1247 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
| 1248 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
| 1249 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
| 1250 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
| 1251 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
| 1252 | |
| 1253 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
| 1254 | |
| 1255 Here is an example of columns: | |
| 1256 | |
| 1257 horse apple bus | |
| 1258 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
| 1259 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
| 1260 | |
| 1261 Doing the following settings: | |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
| 1264 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
| 1265 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
| 1266 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
| 1267 | |
| 1268 | |
| 1269 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
| 1270 | |
| 1271 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
| 1272 | |
| 1273 It results: | |
| 1274 | |
| 1275 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
| 1276 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
| 1277 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
| 1278 | |
| 1279 delim-col has the following options: | |
| 1280 | |
| 1281 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
| 1282 before all columns. | |
| 1283 | |
| 1284 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
| 1285 between each column. | |
| 1286 | |
| 1287 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
| 1288 after all columns. | |
| 1289 | |
| 1290 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
| 1291 each column. | |
| 1292 | |
| 1293 delim-col has the following commands: | |
| 1294 | |
| 1295 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
| 1296 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
| 1297 | |
|
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1298 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
| 30319 | 1299 were operated on recently. |
| 1300 | |
| 1301 M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode. | |
| 1302 | |
| 1303 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable | |
| 1304 recentf at Emacs startup. | |
| 1305 | |
| 1306 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu | |
| 1307 filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent | |
| 1308 file list can be displayed: | |
| 1309 | |
| 1310 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. | |
| 1311 - sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending. | |
| 1312 - showing pathes relative to the current default-directory | |
| 1313 | |
| 1314 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to | |
| 1315 dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
|
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1316 |
| 26149 | 1317 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
| 1318 text. | |
| 1319 | |
| 26924 | 1320 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
| 26786 | 1321 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
| 1322 specific to Message mode. | |
| 1323 | |
| 26924 | 1324 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
| 1325 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
| 1326 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
| 1327 | |
|
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1328 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
|
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1329 interface to access directory servers using different directory |
|
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1330 protocols. It has a separate manual. |
|
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1331 |
| 28132 | 1332 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
| 1333 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
| 1334 | |
| 28710 | 1335 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
|
28855
1be9a502caca
Cleaned some left over bogus conflict markers.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28854
diff
changeset
|
1336 |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1337 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
| 28710 | 1338 minibuffer with completion. |
|
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1339 |
| 28883 | 1340 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
| 1341 with the diary features. | |
| 1342 | |
| 28912 | 1343 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
| 1344 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
| 1345 | |
| 29814 | 1346 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
| 1347 Fill mode. | |
| 1348 | |
| 25853 | 1349 ** Withdrawn packages |
| 1350 | |
| 1351 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
| 1352 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
| 26133 | 1353 |
| 27369 | 1354 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
| 1355 | |
| 1356 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
| 29102 | 1357 |
| 1358 | |
| 1359 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, | |
| 1360 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
| 1361 | |
| 30564 | 1362 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
| 1363 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
| 1364 frame or window. | |
| 1365 | |
| 30516 | 1366 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
| 1367 were added | |
| 1368 | |
| 1369 - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
| 1370 | |
| 1371 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be | |
| 1372 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. | |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
| 1375 | |
| 1376 Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The | |
| 1377 comparison is done with `eq'. | |
| 1378 | |
| 1379 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. | |
| 30511 | 1380 |
| 30502 | 1381 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
| 1382 has been changed. | |
| 1383 | |
| 30357 | 1384 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
| 1385 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
| 1386 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
| 1387 | |
| 30219 | 1388 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
| 1389 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
| 30203 | 1390 |
|
30158
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
1391 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
|
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
1392 function was declared obsolete. |
|
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
1393 |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1394 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
|
30158
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
1395 retained as an alias). |
|
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
1396 |
|
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1397 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
|
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1398 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result |
|
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1399 is automatically converted to Emacs' form. |
|
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1400 |
| 30038 | 1401 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
| 1402 | |
| 1403 - Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES | |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW, | |
| 1406 MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'. | |
| 1407 | |
| 30006 | 1408 ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows |
| 1409 | |
| 1410 - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT | |
| 1411 | |
| 1412 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
| 1413 | |
| 1414 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
| 1415 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
| 1416 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
| 1417 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
| 1418 returned. | |
| 1419 | |
| 1420 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
| 1421 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
| 1422 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
| 1423 minibuffer even if it is active. | |
| 1424 | |
| 1425 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
| 1426 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
| 1427 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
| 1428 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
| 1429 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
| 1430 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
| 1431 | |
| 1432 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
| 1433 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
| 1434 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
| 1435 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
| 1436 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
| 1437 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
| 1438 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
| 1439 | |
| 30564 | 1440 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
| 1441 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
| 1442 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
| 29657 | 1443 |
| 29637 | 1444 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
| 1445 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
| 30290 | 1446 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
| 1447 Default value is nil. | |
| 29637 | 1448 |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1449 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
| 29633 | 1450 meaning no limit. |
| 1451 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1452 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
| 29509 | 1453 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
| 1454 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
| 1455 | |
| 29286 | 1456 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list |
| 29238 | 1457 of a primitive. |
| 1458 | |
| 29286 | 1459 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
| 1460 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
| 1461 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
| 1462 than replacing the local map. | |
| 1463 | |
|
29381
580f03a746d8
find-image, {before,after}-change-function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29286
diff
changeset
|
1464 ** The obsolete variables before-change-function and |
|
580f03a746d8
find-image, {before,after}-change-function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29286
diff
changeset
|
1465 after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed. |
| 29498 | 1466 |
| 1467 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
| 1468 | |
|
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
1469 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
1470 promised long ago. |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
1471 |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1472 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
| 25853 | 1473 |
| 1474 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
| 1475 | |
| 1476 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
| 1477 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
| 1478 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
| 1479 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
| 1480 | |
| 29506 | 1481 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
| 1482 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
| 1483 when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a | |
| 1484 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. | |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and | |
| 1487 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it | |
| 1488 contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
| 1489 | |
| 1490 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
| 1491 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
| 1492 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
| 1493 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
| 1494 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
| 1495 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
| 1496 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
| 1497 eight-bit-graphic. | |
| 1498 | |
| 1499 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
| 1500 | |
| 1501 A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for | |
| 1502 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a | |
| 1503 character set as previously. | |
| 1504 | |
| 1505 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
| 1506 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
| 1507 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
| 1508 | |
| 1509 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
| 1510 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
| 1511 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
| 1512 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
| 1513 | |
| 1514 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
| 1515 name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font. | |
| 1516 | |
| 1517 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
| 1518 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
| 1519 "fontset-default". | |
| 1520 | |
| 1521 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
| 1522 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
| 1523 | |
| 1524 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
| 1525 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
| 1526 buffers and strings. | |
| 1527 | |
| 1528 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
| 1529 character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
| 1530 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
| 1531 have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
| 1532 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
| 1533 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
| 1534 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
| 1535 also been deleted. | |
| 1536 | |
| 1537 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
| 1538 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
| 1539 `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
| 1540 | |
| 1541 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
| 1542 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
| 1543 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
| 1544 may differ between buffer and string text. | |
| 1545 | |
| 1546 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
| 1547 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
| 1548 | |
| 1549 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
| 1550 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
| 1551 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
| 1552 `composition' from STRING. | |
| 1553 | |
| 1554 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
| 1555 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
| 1556 | |
| 1557 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
| 1558 obsolete. | |
| 1559 | |
| 1560 ** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for | |
| 1561 Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this | |
| 1562 character set is not used. | |
| 1563 | |
| 1564 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and | |
| 1565 `japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS | |
| 1566 X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
| 1567 | |
| 1568 +++ | |
| 1569 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' | |
| 1570 are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and | |
|
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1571 0xA0..0xFF respectively. |
| 29506 | 1572 |
| 28883 | 1573 +++ |
| 28847 | 1574 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
| 1575 that offset in the file before writing. | |
| 1576 | |
|
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1577 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
|
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1578 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). |
| 28724 | 1579 |
| 28710 | 1580 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
| 1581 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
| 1582 from which the command was issued. | |
| 1583 | |
| 1584 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
| 1585 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
| 1586 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
| 1587 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
| 1588 operate on. | |
| 1589 | |
| 28658 | 1590 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
| 1591 to `window-buffer-height'. | |
| 1592 | |
| 1593 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
| 1596 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
| 1597 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
| 1598 | |
| 1599 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
| 1600 respectively. | |
| 1601 | |
| 1602 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument | |
| 1603 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. | |
| 1604 | |
| 1605 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
| 1606 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
| 1607 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
| 1608 | |
| 1609 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
| 1610 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
| 1611 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
| 1612 is currently displayed in some window. | |
| 1613 | |
| 28556 | 1614 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
| 1615 argument function's results. | |
| 1616 | |
| 28496 | 1617 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
| 1618 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. | |
| 1619 | |
| 28492 | 1620 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
| 1621 header is the list of headers passed to it. | |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
| 1624 ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
| 1625 | |
| 1626 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
| 28323 | 1627 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
| 1628 as follows: | |
| 1629 | |
| 1630 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
| 1631 nil don't display a cursor | |
| 1632 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
| 1633 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
| 1634 others display a box cursor. | |
| 1635 | |
| 28303 | 1636 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
| 1637 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
| 1638 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
| 1639 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
| 1640 | |
| 28194 | 1641 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
|
28854
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
1642 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
| 28194 | 1643 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
| 1644 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
| 1645 | |
| 1646 Example: | |
| 1647 | |
| 1648 (string-to-syntax "()") | |
| 1649 => (4 . 41) | |
| 1650 | |
| 28166 | 1651 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
| 1652 other than 10. | |
| 1653 | |
| 1654 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
| 1655 INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
| 1656 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1657 #b1111 |
| 28166 | 1658 => 15 |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1659 #b-1111 |
| 28166 | 1660 => -15 |
| 1661 | |
| 1662 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
| 1663 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1664 #o666 |
| 28166 | 1665 => 438 |
| 1666 | |
| 1667 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
| 1668 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1669 #xbeef |
| 28166 | 1670 => 48815 |
| 1671 | |
| 1672 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
| 1673 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1674 #2R-111 |
| 28166 | 1675 => -7 |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1676 #25rah |
| 28166 | 1677 => 267 |
| 1678 | |
| 28335 | 1679 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
|
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
1680 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
| 28037 | 1681 and isn't a string. |
| 1682 | |
| 28335 | 1683 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
| 1684 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
| 1685 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
| 1686 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
| 1687 | |
|
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1688 +++ |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1689 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1690 |
| 28149 | 1691 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
|
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1692 for a regexp in a string. |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1693 |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1694 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1695 `mouse-position-function'. |
|
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1696 |
| 27827 | 1697 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
| 1698 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
| 1699 | |
| 27820 | 1700 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
| 1701 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
| 1702 | |
| 27770 | 1703 +++ |
| 1704 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
| 1705 returns it. | |
| 1706 | |
| 27276 | 1707 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
| 1708 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
| 1709 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1710 +++ |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1711 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1712 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1713 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1714 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1715 mode. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1716 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1717 +++ |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1718 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1719 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
|
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1720 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1721 +++ |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1722 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1723 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1724 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1725 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1726 been performed." |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1727 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1728 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1729 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1730 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1731 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1732 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1733 +++ |
| 26737 | 1734 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
| 1735 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
| 1736 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
| 1737 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1738 +++ |
| 26467 | 1739 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
| 1740 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
| 1741 specified table. | |
| 1742 | |
| 1743 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
| 1744 | |
| 1745 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
|
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1746 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
|
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1747 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
|
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1748 what BODY returns. |
| 26467 | 1749 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1750 +++ |
|
27693
d8bedafef8d5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27644
diff
changeset
|
1751 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
|
28063
f1b33463506d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28051
diff
changeset
|
1752 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
|
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1753 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1754 +++ |
|
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1755 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
|
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1756 removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
|
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1757 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1758 +++ |
|
26360
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1759 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
|
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1760 instead of being optional. |
|
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1761 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1762 +++ |
|
26277
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1763 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
|
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1764 modify read-only text. |
|
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1765 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1766 +++ |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1767 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1768 |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1769 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1770 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
|
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1771 time functions like strftime. The new variables |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1772 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1773 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1774 |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1775 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1776 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
|
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1777 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
|
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1778 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1779 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1780 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
|
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1781 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
|
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1782 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1783 +++ |
|
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1784 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1785 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1786 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1787 start sequences. |
|
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1788 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1789 +++ |
|
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1790 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
|
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1791 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
|
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1792 |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1793 +++ |
| 25853 | 1794 ** New function `propertize' |
| 1795 | |
| 1796 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
| 1797 strings with text properties. | |
| 1798 | |
| 1799 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
| 1802 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
| 1803 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
| 1804 specified value of that property. Example: | |
| 1805 | |
| 1806 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
| 1807 | |
| 1808 +++ | |
| 1809 ** push and pop macros. | |
| 1810 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1811 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1812 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
| 25853 | 1813 as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
| 1814 | |
| 1815 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
| 1816 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
| 1817 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
| 1818 | |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1819 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1820 |
|
27387
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1821 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
|
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1822 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
|
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1823 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1824 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1825 Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1826 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1827 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1828 |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1829 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1830 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1831 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1832 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
|
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1833 |
| 25853 | 1834 +++ |
| 1835 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | |
| 1836 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | |
| 1837 | |
| 1838 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
| 1839 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
| 1840 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
| 1841 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
| 1842 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
| 1843 space, and DEL. | |
| 1844 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
| 1845 and DEL. | |
| 1846 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
| 1847 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
| 1848 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
| 1849 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
| 1850 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
| 1851 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
| 1852 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
| 1853 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
| 1854 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
| 1855 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
| 1856 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
| 1857 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
| 1858 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
| 1859 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
| 1860 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
| 1861 | |
| 1862 +++ | |
| 1863 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
| 1864 | |
| 1865 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
| 1866 | |
| 1867 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
| 1868 | |
| 1869 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
| 1870 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
| 1871 | |
| 1872 :test TEST | |
| 1873 | |
| 1874 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
| 1875 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
| 1876 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
| 1877 | |
| 1878 :size SIZE | |
| 1879 | |
| 1880 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
| 1881 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
| 1882 | |
| 1883 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
| 1884 | |
| 1885 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
| 1886 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
| 1887 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
| 1888 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
| 1889 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
| 1890 | |
| 1891 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
| 1892 | |
| 1893 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
| 1894 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
| 1895 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
| 1896 | |
| 1897 :weakness WEAK | |
| 1898 | |
| 30502 | 1899 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
| 1900 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
| 1901 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
| 1902 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
| 1903 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
| 25853 | 1904 |
| 1905 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
| 1906 | |
| 1907 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
| 1908 | |
| 1909 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
| 1910 | |
| 1911 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
| 1912 | |
| 1913 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
| 1914 | |
| 1915 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
| 1916 values are shared. | |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
| 1919 | |
| 1920 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
| 1921 | |
| 1922 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
| 1923 | |
| 1924 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
| 1925 | |
| 1926 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
| 1927 | |
| 1928 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
| 1929 | |
| 1930 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
| 1931 | |
| 1932 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
| 1933 | |
| 1934 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | |
| 1935 | |
| 1936 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
| 1937 | |
| 1938 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
| 1939 | |
| 1940 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
| 1941 | |
| 1942 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
| 1943 | |
| 1944 Clear TABLE. | |
| 1945 | |
| 1946 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
| 1947 | |
| 1948 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
| 1949 not found. | |
| 1950 | |
| 26264 | 1951 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
| 25853 | 1952 |
| 1953 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
| 1954 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
| 1955 | |
| 1956 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
| 1957 | |
| 1958 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
| 1961 | |
| 1962 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
| 1963 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
| 1964 | |
| 1965 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
| 1966 | |
| 1967 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
| 1968 | |
| 1969 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
| 1970 | |
| 1971 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
| 1972 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
| 26264 | 1973 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
| 25853 | 1974 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
| 1975 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
| 1976 | |
| 1977 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
| 1978 | |
| 1979 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
| 1980 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
| 1981 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
| 1982 | |
| 1983 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
| 1984 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
| 1985 | |
| 1986 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
| 1987 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
| 1988 | |
| 1989 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
| 1990 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
| 1991 | |
| 26264 | 1992 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
| 25853 | 1993 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
| 1994 | |
| 1995 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
| 1996 | |
| 1997 +++ | |
| 1998 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
| 1999 | |
| 2000 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
| 2001 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
| 2002 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
| 2003 | |
| 2004 +++ | |
| 2005 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
| 2006 | |
| 2007 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
| 2008 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 +++ | |
| 2011 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
| 2012 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
| 2013 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
| 2014 is too short to reach that column. | |
| 2015 | |
| 2016 +++ | |
| 2017 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
| 2018 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
| 2019 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
| 2020 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
| 2021 | |
| 2022 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
| 2023 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
| 2024 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
| 2025 | |
| 2026 +++ | |
| 2027 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
| 2028 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
| 2029 | |
| 2030 +++ | |
| 2031 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
| 2032 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
| 2033 | |
| 2034 +++ | |
| 2035 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
| 2036 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
| 2037 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
| 2038 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
| 2039 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 +++ | |
| 2042 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
| 2043 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
| 2044 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
| 2045 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
| 2046 | |
| 2047 +++ | |
| 2048 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
| 2049 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
| 2050 | |
| 2051 +++ | |
| 2052 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
| 2053 | |
| 2054 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
| 2055 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
| 2056 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
| 2057 | |
| 2058 +++ | |
| 2059 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
| 2060 | |
| 2061 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
| 2062 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
| 2063 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
| 2064 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
| 2065 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
| 2066 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
| 2067 | |
| 2068 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
| 2069 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
| 2070 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
| 2071 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
| 2072 | |
| 2073 +++ | |
| 2074 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
| 2075 | |
| 2076 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
| 2077 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
| 2078 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
| 2079 result string. | |
| 2080 | |
| 2081 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
| 2082 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
| 2083 | |
| 2084 Example: | |
| 2085 | |
| 2086 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
| 2087 (s2 "world")) | |
| 2088 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
| 2089 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
| 26034 | 2090 (format s1 s2)) |
| 25853 | 2091 |
| 2092 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
| 2093 | |
| 2094 +++ | |
| 2095 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
| 2096 | |
| 2097 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
| 2098 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
| 2099 argument in it. | |
| 2100 | |
| 2101 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
| 2102 (arg "world")) | |
| 2103 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
| 2104 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
| 2105 (message msg arg)) | |
| 2106 | |
| 2107 +++ | |
| 2108 ** Sound support | |
| 2109 | |
| 2110 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
| 2111 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
| 2112 | |
| 2113 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
| 2114 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
| 2115 to enable sound support. | |
| 2116 | |
| 2117 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
| 2118 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
| 2119 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
| 2120 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
| 2121 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
| 2122 | |
| 2123 The following sound properties are supported: | |
| 2124 | |
| 2125 - `:file FILE' | |
| 2126 | |
| 2127 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
| 2128 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
| 2129 | |
| 27148 | 2130 - `:data DATA' |
| 2131 | |
| 2132 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
| 2133 may be present, but not both. | |
| 2134 | |
| 25853 | 2135 - `:volume VOLUME' |
| 2136 | |
| 2137 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
| 2138 0..1. This property is optional. | |
| 2139 | |
| 2140 Other properties are ignored. | |
| 2141 | |
| 2142 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
| 26933 | 2143 |
| 2144 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
| 2145 a keyword symbol. | |
|
27145
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2146 |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2147 ** Changes to garbage collection |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2148 |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2149 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2150 of live and free strings. |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2151 |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2152 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2153 strings that have been consed so far. |
|
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
2154 |
| 25853 | 2155 |
| 29151 | 2156 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
| 2157 Lisp Manual | |
| 2158 | |
| 30222 | 2159 +++ |
| 2160 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. | |
| 29939 | 2161 |
| 2162 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an | |
| 2163 image. | |
| 2164 | |
| 2165 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
| 2166 | |
| 2167 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
| 2168 | |
| 2169 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
| 2170 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
| 2171 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
| 2172 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
| 2173 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
| 2174 | |
| 29506 | 2175 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
| 2176 satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
| 2177 | |
| 2178 +++ | |
| 2179 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now | |
| 2180 optional. | |
| 2181 | |
| 29151 | 2182 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'. |
| 2183 | |
| 2184 When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered | |
| 2185 around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn | |
| 2186 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text | |
| 2187 properties and overlays that apply to the image. | |
| 2188 | |
| 2189 | |
| 25853 | 2190 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
| 2191 | |
| 2192 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
| 2193 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
| 2194 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
| 2195 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
| 2196 | |
| 28634 | 2197 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
| 2198 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
| 2199 | |
| 2200 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
| 2201 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
| 2202 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
| 2203 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
| 2204 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
| 2205 just display it black instead. | |
| 2206 | |
| 2207 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
| 2208 a line like | |
| 2209 | |
| 2210 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 in your `.emacs'. | |
| 2213 | |
| 25853 | 2214 ** New face implementation. |
| 2215 | |
| 2216 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
| 2217 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
| 2218 | |
| 2219 +++ | |
| 2220 *** New faces. | |
| 2221 | |
| 2222 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
| 2223 | |
| 2224 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
| 26264 | 2225 |
| 25853 | 2226 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
| 2227 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
| 26264 | 2228 |
| 25853 | 2229 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
| 26264 | 2230 |
| 25853 | 2231 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
| 26264 | 2232 |
| 25853 | 2233 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
| 26264 | 2234 |
| 25853 | 2235 6. Foreground color. |
| 26264 | 2236 |
| 25853 | 2237 7. Background color. |
| 2238 | |
| 2239 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
| 2240 | |
| 2241 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
| 2242 | |
| 2243 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
| 2244 | |
| 2245 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
| 2246 | |
| 2247 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
| 2248 color. | |
| 2249 | |
| 2250 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
| 2251 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
| 2252 | |
| 2253 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
| 2254 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
| 2255 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
| 2256 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
| 2257 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | |
| 2258 attributes mentioned above. | |
| 2259 | |
| 2260 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
| 2261 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
| 2262 created frames. | |
| 26264 | 2263 |
| 25853 | 2264 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
| 2265 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
| 2266 `fully-specified'. | |
| 2267 | |
| 2268 +++ | |
| 2269 *** Face merging. | |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
| 2272 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
| 2273 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
| 2274 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
| 2275 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
| 2276 results in a fully-specified face. | |
| 2277 | |
| 2278 +++ | |
| 2279 *** Face realization. | |
| 2280 | |
| 2281 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
| 2282 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
| 2283 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
| 2284 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
| 2285 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
| 2286 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
| 2287 | |
| 2288 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
| 2289 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
| 2290 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
| 2291 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
| 2292 | |
| 2293 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
| 2294 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
| 2295 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
| 2296 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
| 2297 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
| 2298 | |
| 2299 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
| 2300 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
| 2301 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
| 2302 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
| 2303 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
| 2304 Emacs. | |
| 2305 | |
| 2306 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
| 2307 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
| 2308 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
| 2309 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
| 2310 | |
| 2311 ++++ | |
| 2312 **** Clearing face caches. | |
| 2313 | |
| 2314 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
| 2315 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
| 2316 unused fonts. | |
| 2317 | |
| 2318 +++ | |
| 2319 *** Font selection. | |
| 26264 | 2320 |
| 25853 | 2321 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
| 2322 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
| 2323 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
| 2324 | |
| 2325 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
| 2326 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
| 2327 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
| 2328 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
| 2329 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
| 2330 | |
| 2331 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
| 2332 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
| 2333 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
| 2334 | |
| 2335 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
| 2336 | |
| 2337 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
| 2338 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
| 2339 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
| 2340 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
| 2341 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
| 2342 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
| 2343 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
| 2344 | |
| 2345 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | |
| 2346 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | |
| 2347 face doesn't exist. | |
| 2348 | |
| 2349 +++ | |
| 2350 **** Scalable fonts | |
| 2351 | |
| 2352 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
| 2353 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
| 2354 servers. | |
| 2355 | |
| 2356 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
| 26034 | 2357 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
| 25853 | 2358 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
| 2359 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
| 2360 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
| 2361 that list. Example: | |
| 2362 | |
| 2363 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
| 2364 | |
| 2365 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
| 2366 | |
| 2367 +++ | |
| 2368 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
| 2369 | |
| 2370 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
| 2371 | |
| 2372 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
| 2373 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
| 2374 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
| 2375 | |
| 2376 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
| 2377 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
| 2378 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
| 2379 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
| 2380 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
| 2381 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
| 2382 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
| 2383 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
| 2384 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
| 2385 of the face font sort order. | |
| 2386 | |
| 26264 | 2387 - Function: x-font-family-list |
| 25853 | 2388 |
| 2389 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
| 2390 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
| 2391 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
| 2392 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
| 2393 | |
| 2394 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
| 2395 | |
| 2396 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
| 2397 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
| 2398 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
| 2399 | |
| 2400 +++ | |
| 2401 *** Setting face attributes. | |
| 2402 | |
| 2403 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
| 2404 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
| 2405 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
| 2406 `face-attribute'. | |
| 2407 | |
| 2408 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
| 2409 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
| 2410 | |
| 2411 The following attributes are recognized: | |
| 2412 | |
| 2413 `:family' | |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
| 2416 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
| 2417 and `?' are allowed. | |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 `:width' | |
| 2420 | |
| 2421 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
| 2422 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
| 2423 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
| 2424 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
| 2425 | |
| 2426 `:height' | |
| 2427 | |
| 2428 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | |
| 2429 1/10 pt. | |
| 2430 | |
| 2431 `:weight' | |
| 2432 | |
| 2433 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
| 2434 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
| 2435 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
| 2436 | |
| 2437 `:slant' | |
| 2438 | |
| 2439 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
| 2440 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
| 2441 `reverse-oblique'. | |
| 2442 | |
| 2443 `:foreground', `:background' | |
| 2444 | |
| 2445 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
| 2446 | |
| 2447 `:underline' | |
| 2448 | |
| 2449 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
| 2450 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
| 2451 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
| 2452 don't underline. | |
| 2453 | |
| 2454 `:overline' | |
| 2455 | |
| 2456 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
| 2457 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
| 2458 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
| 2459 overline. | |
| 2460 | |
| 2461 `:strike-through' | |
| 2462 | |
| 2463 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
| 2464 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
| 2465 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
| 2466 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
| 2467 | |
| 2468 `:box' | |
| 2469 | |
| 2470 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
| 2471 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
| 2472 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
| 2473 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
| 2474 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
| 2475 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
| 2476 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
| 2477 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
| 2478 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
| 2479 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
| 2480 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
| 2481 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
| 2482 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
| 2483 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
| 2484 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
| 2485 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
| 2486 box. | |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 `:inverse-video' | |
| 2489 | |
| 2490 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
| 2491 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 `:stipple' | |
| 2494 | |
| 2495 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
| 2496 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
| 2497 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
| 2498 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
| 2499 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
| 2500 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
| 2501 | |
| 2502 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
| 2503 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
| 2504 | |
| 2505 `:font' | |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
| 2508 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
| 2509 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
| 2510 versions of Emacs. | |
| 2511 | |
| 2512 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
| 2513 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
| 2514 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
| 2515 | |
| 2516 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
| 2517 `defface'. | |
| 2518 | |
| 2519 *** Face attributes and X resources | |
| 2520 | |
| 2521 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
| 2522 from X resources: | |
| 2523 | |
| 2524 Face attribute X resource class | |
| 2525 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 2526 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
| 2527 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
| 2528 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
| 2529 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
| 2530 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
| 2531 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
| 2532 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
| 2533 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
| 2534 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
| 2535 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
| 2536 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
| 2537 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
| 2538 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
| 26264 | 2539 or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 25853 | 2540 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 2541 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
| 2542 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
| 2543 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
| 2544 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
| 2545 | |
| 2546 +++ | |
| 2547 *** Text property `face'. | |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
| 2550 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
| 2551 specification can be | |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
| 2554 | |
| 2555 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
| 2556 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
| 2557 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
| 2558 for face attribute names. | |
| 2559 | |
| 2560 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
| 2561 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
| 2562 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
| 2563 | |
| 2564 +++ | |
| 2565 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
| 2566 | |
|
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2567 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2568 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2569 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
| 25853 | 2570 default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
|
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2571 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
| 25853 | 2572 used to clear the mapping table. |
| 2573 | |
|
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2574 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2575 |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2576 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2577 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2578 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2579 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2580 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2581 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2582 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2583 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2584 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2585 modify their color-related behavior. |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2586 |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2587 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2588 any frame type. |
|
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
2589 |
|
27573
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2590 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2591 |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2592 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2593 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2594 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2595 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2596 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2597 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2598 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2599 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2600 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
|
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
2601 |
| 25853 | 2602 +++ |
| 2603 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2604 |
| 25853 | 2605 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
| 2606 | |
| 2607 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | |
| 2608 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
| 2609 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
| 2610 | |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2611 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2612 |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2613 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2614 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2615 text-property. |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2616 |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2617 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2618 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2619 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2620 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
| 27144 | 2621 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
| 2622 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
| 2623 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
| 2624 functions. | |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2625 |
|
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2626 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2627 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
|
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
2628 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
| 25853 | 2629 |
|
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2630 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2631 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2632 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2633 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2634 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2635 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2636 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2637 constrained position if that is is different. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2638 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2639 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2640 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2641 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2642 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2643 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2644 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2645 fields. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2646 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2647 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2648 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2649 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2650 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2651 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2652 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2653 - Function: erase-field &optional POS |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2654 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2655 Erases the field surrounding POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2656 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2657 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2658 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2659 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2660 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2661 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2662 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2663 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2664 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2665 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2666 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2667 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2668 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2669 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2670 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2671 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2672 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field, |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2673 then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2674 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2675 - Function: field-string &optional POS |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2676 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2677 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2678 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2679 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2680 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2681 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2682 |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2683 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2684 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2685 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
|
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
2686 |
| 25853 | 2687 +++ |
| 2688 ** Image support. | |
| 2689 | |
| 2690 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
| 2691 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
| 2692 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
| 2693 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
| 2694 | |
| 2695 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
| 2696 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
| 2697 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
| 2698 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
| 2699 area. | |
| 2700 | |
| 2701 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
| 2702 | |
| 2703 *** Image specifications | |
| 2704 | |
| 2705 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
| 2706 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
| 2707 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
| 26403 | 2708 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
| 2709 described below are ignored. | |
| 25853 | 2710 |
| 2711 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
| 2712 | |
| 2713 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
| 2714 | |
| 28789 | 2715 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
| 2716 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2717 to use for its ascent. |
| 28789 | 2718 |
| 2719 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
| 2720 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
| 2721 | |
|
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2722 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
| 29151 | 2723 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
| 2724 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
| 2725 overlays that apply to the image. | |
| 25853 | 2726 |
| 2727 `:margin MARGIN' | |
| 2728 | |
| 26264 | 2729 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as |
| 25853 | 2730 margin around the image. Default is 0. |
| 2731 | |
| 2732 `:relief RELIEF' | |
| 2733 | |
| 2734 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
| 2735 around an image. | |
| 2736 | |
| 2737 `:algorithm ALGO' | |
| 2738 | |
| 2739 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | |
| 2740 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | |
| 2741 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | |
| 2742 which is intended to display images "disabled." | |
| 2743 | |
| 2744 `:heuristic-mask BG' | |
| 2745 | |
| 2746 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | |
| 2747 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | |
| 2748 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | |
| 2749 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | |
| 2750 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | |
| 2751 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | |
| 2752 background of the image. | |
| 2753 | |
| 2754 `:file FILE' | |
| 2755 | |
| 2756 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
| 2757 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
| 2758 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
| 2759 may be present in the image specification. | |
| 2760 | |
|
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2761 `:data DATA' |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2762 |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2763 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2764 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2765 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2766 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
|
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2767 |
| 25853 | 2768 *** Supported image types |
| 2769 | |
| 26034 | 2770 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
| 25853 | 2771 |
| 2772 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
| 2773 properties supported are | |
| 2774 | |
| 2775 `:foreground FG' | |
| 2776 | |
| 2777 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
| 2778 is the frame's foreground. | |
| 2779 | |
| 2780 `:background FG' | |
| 2781 | |
| 2782 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
| 2783 the frame's background color. | |
| 2784 | |
| 2785 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
| 2786 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
| 2787 instead of a `:file' property. | |
| 2788 | |
| 2789 `:width WIDTH' | |
| 2790 | |
| 2791 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
| 2792 | |
| 2793 `:height HEIGHT' | |
| 2794 | |
| 2795 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
| 2796 | |
| 2797 `:data DATA' | |
| 2798 | |
| 2799 DATA must be either | |
| 2800 | |
| 2801 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
| 2802 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
| 2805 | |
| 2806 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
| 2807 bitmap. | |
| 2808 | |
| 28748 | 2809 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
| 2810 height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
| 2811 in the file. | |
| 2812 | |
| 25853 | 2813 **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
| 2814 | |
| 2815 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
| 2816 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
| 2817 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
| 2818 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
| 2819 | |
| 2820 Additional image properties supported are: | |
| 2821 | |
| 2822 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
| 2825 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
| 2826 name. | |
| 2827 | |
| 2828 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
| 2829 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
| 2830 | |
| 2831 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
| 2832 to display compressed images. | |
| 2833 | |
| 2834 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
| 2835 | |
| 2836 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
| 2837 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | |
| 2838 defined. | |
| 2839 | |
| 2840 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
| 2841 | |
| 2842 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
| 27055 | 2843 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
| 2844 are: | |
| 2845 | |
| 25853 | 2846 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
| 2847 | |
| 2848 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
| 2849 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
| 2850 properties defined. | |
| 2851 | |
| 2852 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
| 2853 | |
| 2854 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
| 2855 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
| 2856 | |
| 2857 Additional image properties supported are: | |
| 2858 | |
| 2859 `:index INDEX' | |
| 2860 | |
| 2861 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
| 2862 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | |
| 2863 | |
| 2864 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
| 2865 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
| 2866 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
| 2867 every 0.1 seconds. | |
| 2868 | |
| 2869 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
| 2870 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
| 2871 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
| 2872 | |
| 2873 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
| 2874 (when (= idx max) | |
| 2875 (setq idx 0)) | |
|
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2876 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
| 25853 | 2877 (save-excursion |
| 2878 (set-buffer buffer) | |
| 2879 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
| 2880 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
| 2881 (insert-image img "x")) | |
| 2882 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
| 2883 | |
| 2884 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
| 2885 | |
| 2886 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
| 2887 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
| 2888 properties defined. | |
| 2889 | |
| 2890 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
| 2891 | |
| 2892 Additional image properties supported are: | |
| 2893 | |
| 2894 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
| 2895 | |
| 2896 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
| 26034 | 2897 integer. This is a required property. |
| 25853 | 2898 |
| 2899 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
| 2900 | |
| 2901 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
| 26034 | 2902 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
| 25853 | 2903 |
| 2904 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
| 2905 | |
| 2906 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
| 2907 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
| 2908 files. This is an required property. | |
| 2909 | |
| 2910 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
| 2911 lisp/gs.el. | |
| 2912 | |
| 2913 *** Lisp interface. | |
| 2914 | |
| 26264 | 2915 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
| 2916 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
| 25853 | 2917 |
| 2918 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
| 2919 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
| 2920 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
| 28759 | 2921 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
| 2922 images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
| 25853 | 2923 |
| 2924 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
| 2925 | |
| 2926 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
| 2927 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
| 2928 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
| 2929 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
| 2930 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
| 2931 buffer. | |
| 2932 | |
| 2933 +++ | |
| 2934 ** Display margins. | |
| 2935 | |
| 2936 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
| 2937 and images. | |
| 2938 | |
| 2939 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
| 2940 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
| 2941 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
| 2942 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
| 2943 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
| 2944 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
| 2945 of the display margins. | |
| 2946 | |
| 2947 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
| 2948 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
| 2949 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
| 2950 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
| 2951 in this file). | |
| 2952 | |
| 2953 +++ | |
| 2954 ** Help display | |
| 2955 | |
| 2956 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
| 2957 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
| 2958 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
| 2959 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
| 2960 | |
| 30219 | 2961 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
| 30305 | 2962 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
| 30372 | 2963 the window in which the help was found. |
| 2964 | |
| 2965 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
| 2966 `help-echo' text property was found. | |
| 2967 | |
| 2968 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
| 2969 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
| 2970 | |
| 2971 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
|
30467
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
2972 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
| 30372 | 2973 mouse. |
| 30219 | 2974 |
| 2975 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a | |
| 2976 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
| 2977 | |
| 2978 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
| 2979 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
| 2980 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
| 2981 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
| 2982 used as help string. | |
| 25853 | 2983 |
| 2984 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
|
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
2985 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
|
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
2986 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
| 25853 | 2987 |
| 2988 +++ | |
| 2989 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
| 2990 | |
| 2991 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
| 2992 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
| 2993 | |
| 2994 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
| 2995 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
| 2996 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
| 2997 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
| 2998 used. | |
| 2999 | |
| 26264 | 3000 (global-set-key [A-down] |
| 3001 #'(lambda () | |
| 25853 | 3002 (interactive) |
| 26264 | 3003 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 25853 | 3004 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
| 26264 | 3005 (global-set-key [A-up] |
| 25853 | 3006 #'(lambda () |
| 3007 (interactive) | |
| 26264 | 3008 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 25853 | 3009 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
| 3010 | |
| 3011 +++ | |
| 3012 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
| 3013 | |
| 3014 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
| 3015 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
| 3016 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
| 3017 is called with one argument, POS. | |
| 3018 | |
| 3019 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
| 3020 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
| 3021 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
| 3022 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
| 3023 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
| 3024 | |
| 3025 +++ | |
| 3026 ** Tool bar support. | |
| 3027 | |
| 3028 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
| 3029 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
| 3030 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
| 3031 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
| 3032 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
| 3033 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
| 3034 | |
| 3035 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
| 3036 | |
| 3037 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
| 3038 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
| 3039 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
| 26264 | 3040 |
| 25853 | 3041 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
| 3042 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
| 3043 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
| 3044 property (see below). | |
| 26264 | 3045 |
| 25853 | 3046 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
| 3047 binding are currently ignored. | |
| 3048 | |
| 3049 The following properties are recognized: | |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 `:enable FORM'. | |
| 26264 | 3052 |
| 25853 | 3053 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
| 3054 or disabled. | |
| 26264 | 3055 |
| 25853 | 3056 `:visible FORM' |
| 26264 | 3057 |
| 25853 | 3058 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
| 26264 | 3059 |
| 25853 | 3060 `:filter FUNCTION' |
| 3061 | |
| 3062 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
| 3063 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
| 3064 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
| 26264 | 3065 |
| 25853 | 3066 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
| 3067 | |
| 3068 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
| 3069 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
| 26264 | 3070 |
| 25853 | 3071 `:image IMAGES' |
| 3072 | |
| 3073 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
| 3074 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
| 3075 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
| 3076 | |
| 3077 Index Use when item is | |
| 3078 ---------------------------------------- | |
| 3079 0 enabled and selected | |
| 3080 1 enabled and deselected | |
| 3081 2 disabled and selected | |
| 3082 3 disabled and deselected | |
| 26264 | 3083 |
| 28946 | 3084 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
| 3085 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
| 3086 | |
| 25853 | 3087 `:help HELP-STRING'. |
| 26264 | 3088 |
| 25853 | 3089 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
| 3090 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
| 3091 | |
| 3092 *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
| 3093 | |
| 3094 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
| 3095 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
| 3096 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
| 3097 | |
| 26264 | 3098 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
| 25853 | 3099 raised when the mouse moves over them. |
| 3100 | |
| 3101 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
| 3102 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
| 3103 pixels. Default is 1. | |
| 3104 | |
| 3105 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
| 3106 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
| 3107 | |
| 3108 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
| 3109 | |
| 3110 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
| 26264 | 3111 a tool bar item. If |
| 25853 | 3112 |
| 3113 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
| 3114 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
| 3115 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
| 3116 | |
| 3117 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
| 3118 | |
| 3119 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
| 3120 | |
| 3121 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
| 3122 item. | |
| 3123 | |
| 3124 ** Mode line changes. | |
| 3125 | |
| 3126 +++ | |
| 3127 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
| 3128 | |
| 3129 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
| 3130 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
| 3131 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
| 3132 | |
| 3133 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
| 3134 a `local-map' text property. | |
| 3135 | |
| 3136 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
| 3137 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
| 3138 | |
| 3139 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
| 3140 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
| 3141 `local-map' property. | |
| 3142 | |
| 3143 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
| 3144 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
| 3145 example. | |
| 3146 | |
|
26359
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
3147 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
|
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
3148 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
|
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
3149 |
| 25853 | 3150 +++ |
| 3151 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
| 3152 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
| 3153 | |
| 3154 +++ | |
| 3155 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
| 3156 | |
| 3157 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
| 3158 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
| 3159 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
| 3160 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
| 3161 line. | |
| 3162 | |
| 3163 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
| 3164 `header-line'. | |
| 3165 | |
| 3166 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
| 3167 position in the header-line. | |
| 3168 | |
| 3169 +++ | |
| 3170 ** Text property `display' | |
| 3171 | |
| 3172 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | |
| 3173 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | |
| 3174 `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
| 3175 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
| 3176 | |
| 3177 *** Variable width and height spaces | |
| 3178 | |
| 3179 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
| 3180 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
| 3181 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
| 3182 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
| 3183 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
| 3184 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
| 3185 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
| 3186 | |
| 3187 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
| 3188 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
| 3189 properties described below. | |
| 3190 | |
| 3191 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
| 3192 characters having the `display' property. | |
| 3193 | |
| 3194 - :width WIDTH | |
| 3195 | |
| 3196 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
| 3197 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
| 3198 | |
| 3199 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
| 3200 | |
| 3201 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
| 3202 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
| 3203 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
| 3204 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
| 3205 | |
| 3206 - :align-to HPOS | |
| 3207 | |
| 3208 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
| 3209 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
| 3210 | |
| 3211 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
| 3212 | |
| 3213 - :height HEIGHT | |
| 3214 | |
| 3215 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
| 3216 normal line height. | |
| 3217 | |
| 3218 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
| 3219 | |
| 3220 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
| 3221 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
| 3222 | |
| 3223 - :ascent ASCENT | |
| 3224 | |
| 3225 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
| 3226 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
| 3227 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
| 3228 equal to 100. | |
| 3229 | |
| 3230 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
| 3231 | |
| 3232 *** Images | |
| 3233 | |
| 3234 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
| 3235 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
| 3236 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
| 3237 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
| 3238 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
| 3239 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
| 3240 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
| 3241 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
| 3242 as display specification. | |
| 3243 | |
| 3244 *** Other display properties | |
| 3245 | |
| 3246 - :space-width FACTOR | |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
| 3249 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
| 3250 integer or float. | |
| 3251 | |
| 3252 - :height HEIGHT | |
| 3253 | |
| 3254 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
| 3255 | |
| 3256 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
| 3257 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
| 3258 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
| 3259 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
| 3260 a font is available counts as a step. | |
| 3261 | |
| 3262 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
| 3263 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
| 3264 | |
| 3265 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
| 3266 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
| 3267 | |
| 3268 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
| 3269 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
| 3270 | |
| 3271 - :raise FACTOR | |
| 3272 | |
| 3273 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
| 3274 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
| 3275 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
| 3276 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
| 3277 `:height' subproperty. | |
| 3278 | |
| 3279 *** Conditional display properties | |
| 3280 | |
| 3281 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
| 3282 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
| 3283 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
| 3284 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | |
| 3285 the text having the `display' property. | |
| 3286 | |
| 3287 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
| 3288 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
| 3289 | |
| 3290 +++ | |
| 3291 ** New menu separator types. | |
| 3292 | |
| 3293 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
| 3294 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
| 3295 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
| 3296 to specify other menu separator types. | |
| 3297 | |
| 3298 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
| 3299 | |
| 3300 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
| 3301 separator occurs. | |
| 3302 | |
| 3303 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
| 3304 | |
| 3305 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 3306 | |
| 3307 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
| 3308 | |
| 3309 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 3310 | |
| 3311 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
| 3312 | |
| 3313 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 3314 | |
| 3315 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
| 3316 | |
| 3317 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
| 3318 | |
| 3319 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
| 3320 | |
| 3321 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | |
| 3322 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
| 3323 | |
| 3324 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
| 3325 | |
| 3326 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
| 3327 | |
| 3328 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
| 3329 | |
| 3330 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
| 3331 | |
| 3332 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
| 3333 | |
| 3334 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
| 3335 | |
| 3336 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
| 3337 | |
| 3338 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
| 3339 | |
| 3340 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
| 3341 | |
| 3342 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
| 3343 | |
| 3344 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
| 3345 | |
| 3346 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
| 3347 | |
| 3348 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
| 3351 | |
| 3352 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
| 3353 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
| 3354 | |
| 3355 +++ | |
| 3356 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
| 3357 | |
| 3358 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
| 3359 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
| 3360 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
| 3361 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
| 3362 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
| 3363 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
| 3364 default foreground is black. | |
| 3365 | |
| 3366 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
| 3367 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
| 3368 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
| 3369 | |
| 3370 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
| 3371 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
| 3372 | |
| 3373 +++ | |
| 3374 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
| 3375 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
| 3376 | |
| 3377 --- | |
| 3378 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
| 3379 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
| 3380 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
| 3381 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
| 3382 the original window start. | |
| 3383 | |
| 3384 --- | |
| 3385 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
| 3386 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
| 3387 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
| 3388 | |
| 3389 +++ | |
| 3390 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
| 3391 | |
| 3392 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
| 3393 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
| 3394 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
| 3395 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
| 3396 | |
| 3397 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
| 3398 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
| 3399 | |
| 3400 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
| 3401 | |
| 3402 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
| 3403 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
| 3404 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
| 3405 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
| 3406 temporarily to nil, for example | |
| 3407 | |
| 3408 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
| 3409 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
| 3410 | |
| 26264 | 3411 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
| 25853 | 3412 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
|
28094
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3413 |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3414 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3415 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3416 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3417 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3418 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
|
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
3419 support a vertical-bar cursor). |
| 26652 | 3420 ^L |
| 29533 | 3421 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
| 3422 | |
| 3423 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
| 3424 input. | |
| 3425 | |
| 3426 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
| 3427 | |
| 3428 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
| 3429 | |
| 3430 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
| 3431 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
| 3432 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
| 3433 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
| 3434 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
| 3435 | |
| 3436 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
| 3437 been added. | |
| 3438 | |
| 3439 ^L | |
| 3440 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change | |
| 3441 | |
| 3442 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 ^L | |
| 26652 | 3445 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
| 3446 | |
| 3447 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
| 3448 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
| 25853 | 3449 |
| 3450 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
| 3451 | |
| 3452 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
| 3453 | |
| 3454 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
| 3455 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
| 3456 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
| 3457 | |
| 3458 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
| 3459 is the one that is used. | |
| 3460 | |
| 3461 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
| 3462 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
| 3463 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
| 3464 separate from the command's regular output. | |
| 3465 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
| 3466 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
| 3467 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
| 3468 the buffer name. | |
| 3469 | |
| 3470 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
| 3471 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
| 3472 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
| 3473 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
| 3474 | |
| 3475 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
| 3476 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
| 3477 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
| 3478 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
| 3479 | |
| 3480 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
| 3481 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
| 3482 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
| 3483 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
| 3486 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
| 3487 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
| 3488 they never ignore case. | |
| 3489 | |
| 3490 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
| 3491 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
| 3492 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
| 3493 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
| 3494 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
| 3495 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
| 3496 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
| 3497 | |
| 3498 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
| 3499 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
| 3500 | |
| 3501 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
| 3502 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
| 3503 | |
| 3504 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
| 3505 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
| 3506 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
| 3507 | |
| 3508 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
| 3509 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
| 3510 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
| 3511 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
| 3512 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
| 3513 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
| 3514 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
| 3515 | |
| 3516 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
| 3517 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
| 3518 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
| 3519 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
| 3520 | |
| 3521 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
| 3522 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
| 3523 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
| 3524 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
| 3525 | |
| 3526 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
| 3527 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
| 3528 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
| 3529 | |
| 3530 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
| 3531 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
| 3532 doesn't have any effect. | |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
| 3535 not one per buffer. | |
| 3536 | |
| 3537 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
| 3538 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
| 3539 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
| 3542 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
| 3543 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
| 3544 | |
| 3545 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
| 3546 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
| 3547 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
| 3548 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
| 3549 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
| 3550 | |
| 3551 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
| 3552 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
| 3553 | |
| 3554 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
| 3555 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
| 3556 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
| 3557 | |
| 3558 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
| 3559 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
| 3560 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
| 3561 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
| 3562 | |
| 3563 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
| 3564 | |
| 3565 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
| 3566 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
| 3567 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
| 3568 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
| 3569 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
| 3570 | |
| 3571 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
| 3572 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
| 3573 | |
| 3574 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
| 3575 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
| 3576 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
| 3577 `?' on other systems. | |
| 3578 | |
| 3579 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
| 3580 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
| 3581 Unix. | |
| 3582 | |
| 3583 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
| 3584 current codepage when it starts. | |
| 3585 | |
| 3586 ** Mail changes | |
| 3587 | |
| 28051 | 3588 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
| 3589 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
| 3590 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
| 3591 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
| 3592 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
| 3593 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
| 3594 latin-1: | |
| 3595 | |
| 3596 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
| 3597 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
| 3598 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
| 3599 | |
| 25853 | 3600 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
| 3601 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
| 3602 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
| 3603 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
| 3604 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
| 3605 | |
| 3606 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
| 3607 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
| 3608 mail. | |
| 3609 | |
| 3610 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
| 3611 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
| 3612 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
| 3613 list of possible coding systems. | |
| 3614 | |
| 3615 ** CC Mode changes | |
| 3616 | |
| 3617 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
| 3618 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
| 3619 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
| 3620 docstring for details. | |
| 3621 | |
| 3622 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
| 3623 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
| 3624 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
| 3625 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
| 3626 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
| 3627 | |
| 3628 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
| 3629 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
| 3630 | |
| 3631 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
| 3632 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
| 3633 | |
| 3634 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
| 3635 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
| 3636 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
| 3637 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
| 3638 anonymous classes. | |
| 3639 | |
| 3640 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
| 3641 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
| 3642 | |
| 3643 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
| 3644 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
| 3645 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
| 3646 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
| 3647 | |
| 3648 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
| 3649 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
| 3650 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
| 3651 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
| 3652 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
| 3653 | |
| 3654 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
| 3655 | |
| 3656 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
| 3657 | |
| 3658 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
| 3659 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
| 3660 | |
| 3661 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
| 3662 | |
| 3663 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
| 3664 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
| 3665 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
| 3666 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
| 3667 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
| 3668 | |
| 3669 ** Gnus changes. | |
| 3670 | |
| 3671 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
| 3672 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
| 3673 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
| 3674 | |
| 3675 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
| 3676 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
| 3677 group, which is created automatically. | |
| 3678 | |
| 3679 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
| 3680 values. | |
| 3681 | |
| 3682 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
| 3683 | |
| 3684 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
| 3685 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
| 3686 | |
| 3687 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
| 3688 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
| 3689 | |
| 3690 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
| 3691 | |
| 3692 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
| 3693 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
| 3694 | |
| 3695 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
| 3696 | |
| 3697 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
| 3698 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
| 3699 | |
| 3700 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
| 3701 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
| 3702 | |
| 3703 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
| 3704 control over simplification. | |
| 3705 | |
| 3706 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
| 3707 | |
| 3708 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
| 3709 limit. | |
| 3710 | |
| 3711 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
| 3712 | |
| 3713 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
| 3714 | |
| 26264 | 3715 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
| 25853 | 3716 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
| 3717 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
| 3718 | |
| 3719 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
| 3720 `a' forces normal posting method. | |
| 3721 | |
| 3722 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
| 3723 -- `W d'. | |
| 3724 | |
| 3725 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
| 3726 to a non-nil value. | |
| 3727 | |
| 3728 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
| 3729 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
| 3730 | |
| 3731 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
| 3732 has been added. | |
| 3733 | |
| 3734 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
| 3735 | |
| 3736 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
| 3737 | |
| 3738 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
| 3739 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
| 3740 | |
| 3741 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
| 3742 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
| 3743 | |
| 3744 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
| 3745 | |
| 3746 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
| 3747 been added. | |
| 3748 | |
| 3749 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
| 3750 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
| 3751 | |
| 3752 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
| 3753 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
| 3754 | |
| 3755 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
| 3756 | |
| 3757 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
| 3758 | |
| 3759 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
| 3760 | |
| 3761 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
| 3762 | |
| 3763 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
| 3764 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
| 3765 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
| 3766 | |
| 3767 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
| 3768 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
| 3769 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
| 3770 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
| 3771 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
| 3772 | |
| 3773 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
| 3774 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
| 3775 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
| 3776 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
| 3779 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
| 3780 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
| 3781 mismatch. | |
| 3782 | |
| 3783 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
| 3786 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
| 3787 | |
| 3788 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
| 3789 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
| 3790 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
| 3791 removed from the label. | |
| 3792 | |
| 3793 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
| 3794 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
| 3795 | |
| 3796 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
| 3797 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
| 3798 | |
| 3799 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
| 3800 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
| 26264 | 3801 expressions. |
| 25853 | 3802 |
| 3803 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
| 3804 | |
| 3805 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
| 3806 | |
| 3807 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
| 3808 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
| 3809 | |
| 3810 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
| 3811 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
| 3812 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
| 3813 | |
| 3814 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
| 3815 changes with a special face. | |
| 3816 | |
| 3817 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
| 3818 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
| 3819 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
| 3820 | |
| 3821 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
| 3822 | |
| 3823 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
| 3824 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
| 3825 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
| 3826 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
| 3827 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
| 3828 | |
| 3829 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
| 3830 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
| 3831 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
| 3832 | |
| 3833 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
| 3834 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
| 3835 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
| 3836 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
| 3837 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
| 3838 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
| 3839 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
| 3840 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
| 3841 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
| 3844 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
| 3845 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
| 3846 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
| 3847 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
| 3848 program. | |
| 3849 | |
| 3850 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
| 3851 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
| 3852 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
| 3853 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
| 3854 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
| 3855 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
| 3856 | |
| 3857 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
| 3858 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
| 3859 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
| 3860 was not documented clearly before. | |
| 3861 | |
| 3862 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
| 3863 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
| 3864 | |
| 3865 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
| 3868 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
| 3869 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
| 3870 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
| 3871 | |
| 3872 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
| 3873 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
| 3874 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
| 3875 | |
| 3876 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
| 3877 | |
| 3878 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
| 3879 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
| 3880 | |
| 3881 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
| 3882 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
| 3883 integers. | |
| 3884 | |
| 3885 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
| 3886 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
| 3887 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
| 3888 file names and attributes are returned. | |
| 3889 | |
| 3890 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
| 3891 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
| 3892 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | |
| 3893 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
| 3894 returns the result. | |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
| 3897 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
| 3898 | |
| 3899 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
| 3900 | |
| 3901 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
| 3902 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
| 3903 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
| 3904 optionally. | |
| 3905 | |
| 3906 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
| 3907 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
| 3908 | |
| 3909 ** | |
| 3910 The new function process-running-child-p | |
| 3911 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
| 3912 terminal to its own child process. | |
| 3913 | |
| 3914 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
| 3915 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
| 3916 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
| 3917 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
| 3918 | |
| 3919 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
| 3920 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
| 3921 | |
| 3922 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
| 3923 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
| 3924 | |
| 3925 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
| 3926 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
| 3927 to move or copy menu entries. | |
| 3928 | |
| 3929 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
| 3930 | |
| 3931 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
| 3932 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
| 3933 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
| 3934 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
| 3935 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
| 3936 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
| 3937 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
| 3938 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
| 3939 | |
| 3940 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
| 3941 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
| 3942 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
| 3943 | |
| 3944 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
| 3945 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
| 3946 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
| 3947 | |
| 3948 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | |
| 3949 | |
| 3950 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
| 3951 across the boundary. | |
| 3952 | |
| 3953 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
| 3954 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
| 3955 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
| 3956 contains 8-bit characters. | |
| 3957 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
| 3958 contains invalid characters. | |
| 3959 | |
| 3960 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
| 3961 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
| 3962 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
| 3963 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
| 3964 way. | |
| 3965 | |
| 3966 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
| 3967 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
| 3968 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
| 3969 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
| 3970 | |
| 3971 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
| 3972 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
| 3973 | |
| 3974 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
| 3975 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
| 3976 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
| 3977 menus should always use the third argument. | |
| 3978 | |
| 3979 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
| 3980 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
| 3981 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
| 3982 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
| 3983 | |
| 3984 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
| 3985 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
| 3986 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
| 3987 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
| 3988 | |
| 3989 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
| 3990 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
| 3991 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
| 3992 echo area contents. | |
| 3993 | |
| 3994 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
| 3995 | |
| 3996 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
| 3997 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
| 3998 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
| 3999 | |
| 4000 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
| 4001 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
| 26264 | 4002 means to clear out that attribute. |
| 25853 | 4003 |
| 4004 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
| 4005 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
| 4006 | |
| 4007 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
| 4008 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
| 4009 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
| 4010 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
| 4011 | |
| 4012 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
| 4013 the gap of the current buffer. | |
| 4014 | |
| 4015 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
| 4016 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
| 4017 current buffer. | |
| 4018 | |
| 4019 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
| 4020 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
| 4021 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
| 4022 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
| 4023 | |
| 4024 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
| 4025 | |
| 4026 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
| 4027 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
| 4028 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
| 4029 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
| 4030 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
| 4031 | |
| 4032 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
| 4033 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
| 4034 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
| 4035 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
| 4036 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
| 4037 | |
| 4038 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
| 4039 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
| 4040 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
| 4041 | |
| 4042 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
| 4043 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
| 4044 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
| 4045 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
| 4046 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
| 4047 results. | |
| 4048 | |
| 4049 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
| 4050 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
| 4051 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
| 4052 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
| 4053 | |
| 4054 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
| 4055 | |
| 4056 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
| 4057 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
| 4058 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
| 4059 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
| 4060 | |
| 4061 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
| 4062 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
| 4063 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
| 4064 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
| 4065 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
| 4066 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
| 4067 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
| 4068 region. | |
| 4069 | |
| 4070 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
| 4071 selective undo. | |
| 4072 | |
| 4073 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
| 4074 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
| 4075 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
| 4076 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
| 4077 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
| 4078 | |
| 4079 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
| 4080 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
| 4081 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
| 4082 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
| 4083 | |
| 4084 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
| 4085 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
| 4086 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
| 4087 something that most users not do. | |
| 4088 | |
| 4089 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
| 4090 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
| 4091 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
| 4092 applications. | |
| 4093 | |
| 4094 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
| 4095 pasting operations. | |
| 4096 | |
| 4097 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
| 4098 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
| 4099 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
| 4100 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
| 4101 `ps-printer-name'. | |
| 4102 | |
| 4103 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
| 4104 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
| 4105 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
| 4106 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
| 4107 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
| 4108 hits a new word. | |
| 4109 | |
| 4110 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
| 4111 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
| 4112 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
| 4113 | |
| 4114 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
| 4115 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
| 4116 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
| 4117 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
| 4118 | |
| 4119 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
| 4120 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
| 4121 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
| 4122 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
| 4123 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
| 4124 | |
| 4125 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
| 4126 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
| 4129 | |
| 4130 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
| 4131 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
| 4132 respectively. | |
| 4133 | |
| 4134 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
| 4135 | |
| 4136 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
| 4137 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
| 4138 | |
| 4139 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
| 4140 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
| 4141 | |
| 4142 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
| 4143 | |
| 4144 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
| 4145 | |
| 4146 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
| 4147 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
| 4148 | |
| 4149 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
| 26264 | 4150 given in the following case: |
| 25853 | 4151 o When you are using a complex input method. |
| 4152 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
| 4153 | |
| 4154 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
| 4155 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
| 4156 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
| 4157 setting it to t is helpful. | |
| 4158 | |
| 4159 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
| 4160 | |
| 4161 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
| 4162 keys: | |
| 4163 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
| 4164 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
| 4165 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
| 4166 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
| 4167 environment. | |
| 4168 | |
| 4169 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
| 4170 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
| 4171 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
| 4172 get | |
| 4173 | |
| 4174 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
| 4175 | |
| 4176 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
| 4179 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
| 4180 | |
| 4181 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
| 4182 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
| 4183 its owner and group. | |
| 4184 | |
| 4185 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
| 4186 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
| 4187 | |
| 4188 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
| 4189 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
| 4190 | |
| 4191 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
| 4192 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
| 4193 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
| 4194 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
| 4195 | |
| 4196 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
| 4197 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
| 4198 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
| 4199 for writing keyboard macros. | |
| 4200 | |
| 4201 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
| 4202 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
| 4203 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
| 4204 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
| 4205 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
| 4206 info. | |
| 4207 | |
| 4208 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
| 4209 | |
| 4210 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
| 4211 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
| 4212 contents only. | |
| 4213 | |
| 4214 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
| 4215 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
| 4216 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
| 4217 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
| 4218 | |
| 4219 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
| 4220 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
| 4221 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
| 4222 | |
| 4223 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
| 4224 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
| 4225 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
| 4226 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
| 4227 | |
| 4228 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
| 4229 failure if the command produces no output. | |
| 4230 | |
| 4231 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
| 4232 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
| 4233 the mouse. | |
| 4234 | |
| 4235 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
| 4236 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
| 4237 function and variable names. | |
| 4238 | |
| 4239 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
| 4240 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
| 4241 file-coding-system-alist. | |
| 4242 | |
| 4243 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
| 4244 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
| 4245 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
| 4246 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
| 4247 according to the current fontset. | |
| 4248 | |
| 4249 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
| 4250 | |
| 4251 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
| 4252 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
| 4253 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
| 4254 | |
| 4255 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
| 4256 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
| 4257 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
| 4258 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
| 4259 | |
| 4260 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
| 4261 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
| 4262 | |
| 4263 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
| 4264 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
| 4265 | |
| 4266 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
| 4267 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
| 4268 command keys. | |
| 4269 | |
| 4270 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
| 4271 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
| 4272 | |
| 4273 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
| 4274 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
| 4275 all variables that have documentation. | |
| 4276 | |
| 4277 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
| 4278 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
| 4279 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
| 4280 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
| 4281 it should show; the default is 20. | |
| 4282 | |
| 4283 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
| 4284 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
| 4285 of your input. | |
| 4286 | |
| 4287 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
| 4288 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
| 4289 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
| 4290 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
| 4291 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
| 4292 Newly added options are included as well. | |
| 4293 | |
| 4294 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
| 4295 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
| 4296 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
| 4297 | |
| 4298 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
| 4299 Customize menu. | |
| 4300 | |
| 4301 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
| 4302 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
| 4303 | |
| 4304 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
| 4305 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
| 4306 invoked. | |
| 4307 | |
| 4308 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
| 4309 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
| 4310 The default is 1. | |
| 4311 | |
| 4312 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
| 4313 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
| 4314 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
| 4315 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
| 4316 sensibly. | |
| 4317 | |
| 4318 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
| 4319 | |
| 4320 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
| 4321 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
| 4322 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
| 4323 | |
| 4324 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
| 4325 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
| 4326 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
| 4327 every night. | |
| 4328 | |
| 28724 | 4329 ** Desktop changes |
| 4330 | |
| 4331 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
| 25853 | 4332 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. |
| 4333 | |
| 28724 | 4334 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored |
| 4335 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
| 4336 | |
| 25853 | 4337 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to |
| 4338 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
| 4339 | |
| 4340 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
| 4341 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
| 4342 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
| 4343 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
| 4344 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
| 26264 | 4345 made invisible again. |
| 25853 | 4346 |
| 4347 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
| 4348 | |
| 4349 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
| 4350 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
| 4351 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
| 4352 toggle. | |
| 4353 | |
| 4354 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
| 4355 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
| 4356 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
| 4357 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
| 4358 rmail-default-body-file. | |
| 4359 | |
| 4360 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
| 4361 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
| 4362 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
| 4365 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
| 4366 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
| 4367 | |
| 4368 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
| 4369 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
| 4370 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
| 4371 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
| 4372 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
| 4373 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
| 4374 | |
| 4375 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
| 4376 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
| 4377 provided by feedmail are: | |
| 4378 | |
| 4379 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
| 4380 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
| 4381 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
| 4382 | |
| 4383 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
| 4384 be prompted for confirmation | |
| 4385 | |
| 4386 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
| 4387 | |
| 4388 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
| 4389 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
| 4390 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
| 4391 | |
| 4392 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
| 4393 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
| 4394 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
| 4395 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
| 4396 | |
| 4397 ** Dired changes | |
| 4398 | |
| 4399 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
| 4400 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
| 4401 | |
| 4402 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
| 4403 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
| 4404 | |
| 4405 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
| 4406 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
| 4407 for a specified regexp. | |
| 4408 | |
| 4409 ** VC Changes | |
| 4410 | |
| 4411 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
| 4412 conveniently. | |
| 4413 | |
| 4414 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
| 4415 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
| 4416 Dired. | |
| 4417 | |
| 4418 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
| 4419 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
| 4420 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
| 4421 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
| 4422 | |
| 4423 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
| 4424 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
| 4425 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
| 4426 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
| 4427 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
| 4428 | |
| 4429 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
| 4430 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
| 4431 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
| 4432 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
| 4433 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
| 4434 | |
| 4435 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
| 4436 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
| 26264 | 4437 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
| 25853 | 4438 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
| 4439 | |
| 4440 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
| 4441 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
| 4442 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
| 4443 | |
| 4444 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
| 4445 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
| 4446 session to resolve them. | |
| 4447 | |
| 4448 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
| 4449 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
| 4450 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
| 4451 uses as well). | |
| 4452 | |
| 4453 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
| 4454 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
| 4455 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
| 4456 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
| 4457 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
| 4458 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
| 4459 using ediff. | |
| 4460 | |
| 4461 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
| 4462 | |
| 4463 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
| 4464 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
| 4465 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
| 4466 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
| 4467 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
| 4468 | |
| 4469 ** Frame name display changes | |
| 4470 | |
| 4471 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
| 4472 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
| 4473 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
| 4474 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
| 4475 | |
| 4476 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
| 4477 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
| 4478 menu. | |
| 4479 | |
| 4480 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
| 4481 | |
| 4482 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
| 4483 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
| 4484 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
| 4485 | |
| 4486 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
| 4487 | |
| 4488 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
| 4489 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
| 4490 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
| 4491 | |
| 4492 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
| 4493 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
| 4494 the following line. | |
| 4495 | |
| 4496 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
| 4497 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
| 4498 previously sent input. | |
| 4499 | |
| 4500 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
| 4501 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
| 4502 as the search string. | |
| 4503 | |
| 4504 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
| 4505 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
| 4506 | |
| 4507 ** C mode changes | |
| 4508 | |
| 4509 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
| 4510 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
| 4511 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
| 26264 | 4512 definition. |
| 25853 | 4513 |
| 4514 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
| 4515 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
| 4516 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
| 4517 style is still the default however. | |
| 4518 | |
| 4519 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
| 4520 | |
| 4521 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
| 4522 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
| 4523 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
| 4524 | |
| 4525 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
| 4526 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
| 4527 | |
| 4528 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
| 4529 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
| 4530 | |
| 4531 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
| 4532 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
| 4533 | |
| 4534 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
| 4535 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
| 4536 | |
| 4537 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
| 4538 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
| 4539 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
| 4540 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
| 4541 | |
| 4542 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
| 4543 | |
| 26264 | 4544 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
| 25853 | 4545 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
| 4546 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
| 4547 | |
| 4548 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
| 4549 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
| 4550 expanding dynamically. | |
| 4551 | |
| 4552 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
| 4553 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
| 4554 | |
| 4555 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
| 4556 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
| 4557 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
| 4558 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
| 4559 | |
| 4560 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
| 4561 | |
| 4562 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 4563 | |
| 4564 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
| 4565 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
| 4566 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
| 4567 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
| 4568 against the first word in the title. | |
| 4569 | |
| 4570 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
| 4571 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
| 4572 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
| 26264 | 4573 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
| 25853 | 4574 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
| 26264 | 4575 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
| 25853 | 4576 |
| 4577 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
| 4578 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
| 4579 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
| 4580 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
| 4581 | |
| 4582 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
| 4583 | |
| 4584 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
| 4585 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
| 4586 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
| 4587 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
| 4588 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
| 4589 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
| 4590 | |
| 4591 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
| 4592 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
| 4593 | |
| 4594 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
| 4595 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
| 4596 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
| 4599 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
| 4600 | |
| 4601 ** Ispell changes. | |
| 4602 | |
| 26264 | 4603 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
| 4604 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
| 25853 | 4605 are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
| 4606 | |
| 4607 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
| 4608 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
| 4609 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
| 4610 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
| 26264 | 4611 include: |
| 25853 | 4612 |
| 4613 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
| 4614 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
| 4619 | |
| 4620 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
| 4621 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
| 4622 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
| 4623 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
| 4624 | |
| 4625 *** New recursive parser. | |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
| 4628 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
| 4629 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
| 4630 | |
| 4631 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
| 26264 | 4632 |
| 25853 | 4633 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
| 4634 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
| 4635 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
| 4636 | |
| 4637 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
| 4638 | |
| 4639 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
| 4640 | |
| 4641 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
| 4642 | |
| 4643 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
| 4644 | |
| 4645 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
| 4646 | |
| 4647 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
| 4648 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
| 4649 | |
| 4650 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
| 4651 | |
| 4652 *** References to external documents. | |
| 4653 | |
| 4654 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
| 4655 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
| 4656 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
| 4657 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
| 4658 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
| 4659 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
| 4660 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
| 4661 | |
| 4662 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
| 4663 | |
| 4664 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
| 4665 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
| 4666 | |
| 4667 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
| 4668 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
| 4669 | |
| 4670 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
| 4671 | |
| 4672 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
| 4673 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
| 4674 | |
| 4675 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
| 4676 | |
| 4677 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
| 4678 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
| 4679 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
| 4680 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
| 4681 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
| 4682 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
| 4683 more. | |
| 4684 | |
| 4685 *** Support for the varioref package | |
| 4686 | |
| 4687 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
| 4688 | |
| 4689 *** New hooks | |
| 4690 | |
| 4691 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
| 4692 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
| 4693 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
| 4694 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
| 4695 | |
| 4696 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
| 4697 | |
| 4698 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
| 4699 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
| 4700 | |
| 4701 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
| 4702 | |
| 4703 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
| 4704 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
| 4705 fontified, use | |
| 4706 | |
| 4707 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
| 4708 | |
| 4709 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
| 4710 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
| 4711 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
| 4712 directories that contain the same file name. | |
| 4713 | |
| 4714 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
| 4715 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
| 4716 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
| 4717 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
| 4718 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
| 4719 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
| 4720 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
| 4721 directory. | |
| 4722 | |
| 4723 ** New modes and packages | |
| 4724 | |
| 4725 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
| 4726 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
| 4727 it, but some do not. | |
| 4728 | |
| 4729 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
| 4730 code. | |
| 4731 | |
| 4732 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
| 4733 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
| 4734 around in a buffer. | |
| 4735 | |
| 4736 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
| 4737 | |
| 4738 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
| 4739 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
| 4740 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
| 4741 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
| 4742 | |
| 4743 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
| 4744 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
| 4745 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
| 4746 | |
| 4747 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
| 4748 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
| 4749 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
| 4750 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
| 4751 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
| 4752 the like. | |
| 4753 | |
| 4754 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
| 4755 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
| 4756 | |
| 4757 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
| 4758 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
| 4759 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
| 4760 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
| 4761 | |
| 4762 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
| 4763 | |
| 4764 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
| 4765 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
| 4766 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
| 4767 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
| 4768 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
| 4769 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
| 4770 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
| 4771 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
| 4772 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
| 4773 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
| 4774 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
| 4775 | |
| 4776 Platform-specific modes: | |
| 4777 | |
| 4778 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
| 4779 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
| 4780 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
| 4781 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
| 4782 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
| 4783 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
| 4784 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
| 4785 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
| 4786 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
| 4787 | |
| 4788 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
| 4789 | |
| 4790 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
| 4791 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
| 4792 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
| 4793 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
| 4794 | |
| 4795 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
| 4796 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
| 4797 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
| 4798 | |
| 4799 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
| 4800 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
| 4801 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
| 4802 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
| 4803 | |
| 4804 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
| 4805 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
| 4806 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
| 4807 environment. | |
| 4808 | |
| 4809 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
| 4810 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
| 4811 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
| 4812 current input method for reading this one event. | |
| 4813 | |
| 4814 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
| 4815 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
| 4816 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
| 4817 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
| 4818 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
| 4819 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
| 4820 | |
| 4821 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
| 4822 | |
| 4823 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
| 4824 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
| 4825 | |
| 4826 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
| 4827 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
| 4828 always increases point by 1. | |
| 4829 | |
| 4830 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
| 4831 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
| 4832 | |
| 4833 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
| 4834 | |
| 4835 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
| 4836 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
| 4837 default value changed. For example, | |
| 4838 | |
| 4839 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
| 4840 :type 'integer | |
| 4841 :group 'foo | |
| 4842 :version "20.3") | |
| 4843 | |
| 26264 | 4844 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
| 25853 | 4845 :version "20.3") |
| 4846 | |
| 4847 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
| 4848 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
| 4849 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
| 4850 `:version' in the top level group. | |
| 4851 | |
| 4852 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
| 4853 | |
| 4854 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
| 4855 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
| 4856 | |
| 4857 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
| 4858 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
| 4859 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
| 4860 to themselves. | |
| 4861 | |
| 4862 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
| 4863 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
| 4864 values whatever. | |
| 4865 | |
| 4866 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
| 4867 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
| 4868 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
| 4869 | |
| 4870 ** Frame-local variables. | |
| 4871 | |
| 4872 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
| 4873 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
| 4874 local bindings for that variable. | |
| 4875 | |
| 4876 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
| 4877 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
| 4878 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
| 4879 parameter name. | |
| 4880 | |
| 4881 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
| 4882 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
| 4883 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
| 4884 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
| 4885 | |
| 4886 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
| 4887 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
| 4888 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
| 4889 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
| 4890 | |
| 4891 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
| 4892 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
| 4893 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
| 4894 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
| 4895 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
| 4896 | |
| 4897 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
| 4898 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
| 4899 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
| 4900 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
| 4903 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
| 4904 | |
| 4905 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
| 4906 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
| 4907 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
| 4910 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
| 4911 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
| 4912 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
| 4913 | |
| 4914 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
| 4915 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
| 4916 empty input. | |
| 4917 | |
| 4918 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
| 4919 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
| 4920 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
| 4921 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
| 4922 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
| 4923 | |
| 4924 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
| 4925 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
| 4926 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
| 4927 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
| 4928 | |
| 4929 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
| 4930 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
| 4931 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
| 4932 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
| 4933 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
| 4934 | |
| 4935 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
| 4936 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
| 4937 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
| 4938 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
| 4939 | |
| 4940 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
| 4941 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
| 4942 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
| 4943 | |
| 4944 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
| 4945 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
| 4946 was directed to display this buffer. | |
| 4947 | |
| 4948 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
| 4949 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
| 4950 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
| 4951 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
| 4952 set-window-configuration. | |
| 4953 | |
| 4954 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
| 4955 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
| 4956 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
| 4957 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
| 4958 | |
| 4959 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
| 4960 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
| 4961 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
| 4962 | |
| 4963 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
| 4964 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
| 4965 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
| 4968 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
| 4969 | |
| 4970 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
| 4971 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
| 4972 | |
| 4973 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
| 4974 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
| 4975 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
| 4976 | |
| 4977 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
| 4978 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
| 4979 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
| 4980 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
| 4981 | |
| 4982 ** Menu changes | |
| 4983 | |
| 4984 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
| 4985 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
| 4986 better supported. | |
| 4987 | |
| 4988 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
| 4989 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
| 4990 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
| 4991 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
| 4992 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
| 4993 | |
| 4994 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
| 4995 | |
| 4996 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
| 4997 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
| 4998 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
| 4999 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
| 5000 | |
| 5001 The format is: | |
| 5002 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
| 5003 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
| 5004 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
| 5005 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
| 5006 The supported properties include | |
| 5007 | |
| 5008 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
| 5009 item is enabled. | |
| 5010 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
| 5011 item should appear in the menu. | |
| 26264 | 5012 :filter FILTER-FN |
| 25853 | 5013 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
| 5014 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
| 5015 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
| 5016 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
| 5017 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
| 5018 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
| 5019 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
| 5020 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
| 5021 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
| 5022 keyboard binding. | |
| 5023 :key-sequence nil | |
| 5024 This means that the command normally has no | |
| 5025 keyboard equivalent. | |
| 5026 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
| 5027 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
| 5028 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
| 5029 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
| 5030 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
| 5031 | |
| 5032 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
| 5033 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
| 5034 | |
| 5035 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
| 5036 | |
| 5037 ** New event types | |
| 5038 | |
| 5039 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
| 5040 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
| 5041 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
| 5042 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
| 5043 | |
| 5044 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
| 5045 | |
| 5046 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
| 5047 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
| 5048 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
| 5049 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
| 5050 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
| 5051 forward, away from the user. | |
| 5052 | |
| 5053 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
| 5054 | |
| 5055 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
| 5056 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
| 5057 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
| 5058 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
| 5059 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
| 5060 | |
| 5061 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
| 5062 | |
| 5063 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
| 5064 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
| 5065 that were dragged and dropped. | |
| 5066 | |
| 5067 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
| 5068 | |
| 5069 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
| 5070 | |
| 5071 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
| 5072 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
| 5073 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
| 5074 | |
| 5075 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
| 5076 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
| 5077 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
| 5078 | |
| 5079 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
| 5080 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
| 5081 | |
| 5082 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
| 5083 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
| 5084 | |
| 5085 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
| 5086 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
| 5087 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
| 5088 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
| 5089 | |
| 5090 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
| 5091 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
| 5092 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
| 5093 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
| 5094 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
| 5095 | |
| 5096 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
| 5097 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
| 5098 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
| 5099 consistent with the new representation. | |
| 5100 | |
| 5101 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
| 5102 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
| 5103 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
| 5104 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
| 5105 | |
| 5106 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
| 5107 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
| 5108 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
| 5109 | |
| 5110 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
| 5111 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
| 5112 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
| 5113 | |
| 5114 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
| 5115 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
| 5116 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
| 5117 | |
| 5118 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
| 5119 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
| 5120 | |
| 5121 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
| 5122 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
| 5123 | |
| 5124 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
| 5125 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
| 5126 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
| 5127 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
| 5128 | |
| 5129 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
| 5130 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
| 5131 | |
| 5132 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
| 5133 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
| 5134 buffer or string being searched. | |
| 5135 | |
| 5136 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
| 5137 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
| 5138 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
| 5139 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
| 5140 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
| 5141 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
| 5142 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
| 5143 | |
| 5144 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
| 5145 | |
| 5146 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
| 5147 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
| 5148 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
| 5149 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
| 5150 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
| 5151 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
| 5152 define-coding-system-alias. | |
| 5153 | |
| 5154 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
| 5155 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
| 5156 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
| 5157 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
| 5158 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
| 5159 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
| 5160 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
| 5161 `iso-8859-1'. | |
| 5162 | |
| 5163 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
| 5164 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
| 5165 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
| 5166 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
| 5167 | |
| 5168 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
| 5169 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
| 5170 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
| 5171 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
| 5172 | |
| 5173 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
| 5174 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
| 5175 This function requires a user interaction. | |
| 5176 | |
| 5177 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
| 5178 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
| 5179 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
| 5180 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
| 5181 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
| 5182 select-safe-coding-system. | |
| 5183 | |
| 5184 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
| 5185 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
| 5186 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
| 5187 was done. | |
| 5188 | |
| 5189 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
| 5190 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
| 5191 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
| 5192 | |
| 5193 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
| 5194 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
| 5195 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
| 5196 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
| 5197 | |
| 5198 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
| 5199 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
| 5200 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
| 5201 converted. | |
| 5202 | |
| 5203 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
| 5204 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
| 5205 | |
| 5206 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
| 5207 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
| 5208 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
| 5209 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
| 5210 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
| 5211 range of characters. | |
| 5212 | |
| 5213 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
| 5214 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
| 5215 | |
| 5216 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
| 5217 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
| 5218 | |
| 5219 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
| 5220 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
| 5221 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
| 5222 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
| 5223 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
| 5224 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
| 5225 | |
| 5226 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
| 5227 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
| 5228 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
| 5229 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
| 5230 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
| 5231 | |
| 5232 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
| 5233 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
| 5234 | |
| 5235 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
| 5236 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
| 5237 | |
| 5238 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
| 5239 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
| 5240 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
| 5241 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
| 5242 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
| 5243 | |
| 5244 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
| 5245 | |
| 5246 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
| 5247 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
| 5248 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
| 5249 tree structure. | |
| 5250 | |
| 5251 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
| 5252 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
| 5253 | |
| 5254 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
| 5255 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
| 5256 in your .emacs file.) | |
| 5257 | |
| 5258 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
| 5259 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
| 5260 | |
| 5261 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
| 5262 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
| 5263 | |
| 5264 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
| 5265 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
| 5266 kills the region. | |
| 5267 | |
| 5268 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
| 5269 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
| 5270 | |
| 5271 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
| 5272 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
| 5273 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
| 5274 | |
| 5275 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
| 5276 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
| 5277 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
| 5278 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
| 5279 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
| 5280 past.) | |
| 5281 | |
| 5282 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
| 5283 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
| 5284 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
| 5285 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
| 5286 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
| 5287 | |
| 5288 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
| 5289 and is an alias for it. | |
| 5290 | |
| 5291 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
| 5292 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
| 5293 | |
| 5294 ** Scrolling changes | |
| 5295 | |
| 5296 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
| 5297 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
| 5298 | |
| 5299 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
| 5300 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
| 5301 where it started. | |
| 5302 | |
| 5303 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
| 5304 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
| 5305 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
| 5306 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
| 5307 | |
| 5308 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
| 5309 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
| 5310 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
| 5311 recenters the window. | |
| 5312 | |
| 5313 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
| 5314 | |
| 5315 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
| 5316 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
| 5317 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
| 5318 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
| 5319 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
| 5320 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
| 5321 | |
| 5322 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
| 5323 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
| 5324 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
| 5325 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
| 5326 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
| 5327 | |
| 5328 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
| 5329 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
| 5330 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
| 5331 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
| 5332 | |
| 5333 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
| 5334 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
| 5335 | |
| 5336 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
| 5337 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
| 5338 | |
| 5339 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
| 5340 | |
| 5341 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
| 5342 | |
| 5343 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
| 5344 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
| 5345 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
| 5346 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
| 5347 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
| 5348 | |
| 5349 *** Input methods | |
| 5350 | |
| 5351 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
| 5352 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
| 5353 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
| 5354 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
| 5355 support several input methods. | |
| 5356 | |
| 5357 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
| 5358 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
| 5359 work. | |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
| 5362 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
| 5363 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
| 5364 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
| 5365 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
| 5366 letter. | |
| 5367 | |
| 5368 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
| 5369 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
| 5370 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
| 5371 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
| 5372 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
| 5373 | |
| 5374 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
| 5375 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
| 5376 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
| 5377 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
| 5378 | |
| 5379 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
| 5380 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
| 5381 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
| 5382 the first guess is wrong. | |
| 5383 | |
| 5384 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
| 5385 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
| 5386 | |
| 5387 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
| 5388 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
| 5389 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
| 5390 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
| 5391 | |
| 5392 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
| 5393 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
| 5394 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
| 5395 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
| 5396 | |
| 5397 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
| 5400 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
| 5401 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
| 5402 what you want. | |
| 5403 | |
| 5404 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
| 5405 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
| 5406 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
| 5407 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
| 5408 | |
| 5409 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
| 5410 character conversion as well. | |
| 5411 | |
| 5412 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
| 5413 | |
| 5414 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
| 5415 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
| 5416 requires using many fonts. | |
| 5417 | |
| 5418 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
| 5419 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
| 5420 | |
| 5421 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
| 5422 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
| 5423 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
| 5424 you would use a font. | |
| 5425 | |
| 5426 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
| 5427 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
| 5428 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
| 5429 | |
| 5430 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
| 5431 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
| 5432 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
| 5433 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
| 5434 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
| 5435 | |
| 5436 *** Defining fontsets. | |
| 5437 | |
| 5438 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
| 5439 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
| 5440 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
| 5441 | |
| 5442 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
| 5443 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
| 5444 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
| 5445 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
| 5446 | |
| 5447 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
| 5448 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
| 5449 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
| 5450 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
| 5451 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
| 5452 | |
| 5453 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
| 5454 The resource value should have this form: | |
| 5455 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
| 5456 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
| 5457 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
| 5458 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
| 5459 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
| 5460 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
| 5461 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
| 5462 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | |
| 5463 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
| 5464 | |
| 5465 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
| 5466 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
| 5467 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
| 5468 | |
| 5469 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
| 5470 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
| 5471 following resource, | |
| 5472 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
| 5473 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
| 5474 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
| 5475 Here is the substitution rule: | |
| 5476 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
| 5477 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
| 5478 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
| 5479 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
| 5480 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
| 5481 | |
| 5482 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
| 5483 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
| 5484 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
| 5485 | |
| 5486 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
| 5487 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
| 5488 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
| 5489 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
| 5490 fontsets. | |
| 5491 | |
| 5492 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
| 5493 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
| 5494 | |
| 5495 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
| 5496 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
| 5497 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
| 5498 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
| 5499 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
| 5500 system for new files that you create. | |
| 5501 | |
| 5502 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
| 5503 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
| 5504 whole Emacs session. | |
| 5505 | |
| 5506 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
| 5507 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
| 5508 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
| 5509 | |
| 5510 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
| 5511 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
| 5512 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
| 5513 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
| 5514 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
| 5515 | |
| 5516 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
| 5517 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
| 5518 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
| 5519 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
| 5520 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
| 5521 | |
| 5522 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
| 5523 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
| 5524 | |
| 5525 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
| 5526 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
| 5527 | |
| 5528 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
| 5529 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
| 5530 | |
| 5531 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
| 5532 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
| 5533 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
| 5534 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
| 5535 of the file. | |
| 5536 | |
| 5537 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
| 5538 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
| 5539 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
| 5540 translated into that character code. | |
| 5541 | |
| 5542 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
| 5543 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
| 5544 | |
| 5545 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
| 5546 | |
| 5547 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
| 5548 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
| 5549 | |
| 5550 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
| 5551 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
| 5552 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
| 5553 | |
| 5554 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
| 5555 | |
| 5556 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
| 5557 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
| 5558 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
| 5559 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
| 5560 designed to work with terminals. | |
| 5561 | |
| 5562 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
| 5563 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
| 5564 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
| 5565 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
| 5566 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
| 5567 in the corresponding buffer. | |
| 5568 | |
| 5569 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
| 5570 | |
| 5571 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
| 5572 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
| 5573 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
| 5574 | |
| 5575 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
| 5576 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
| 5577 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
| 5578 want to use. | |
| 5579 | |
| 5580 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
| 5581 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
| 5582 | |
| 5583 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
| 5584 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
| 5585 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
| 5586 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
| 5587 | |
| 5588 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
| 5589 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
| 5590 related information. | |
| 5591 | |
| 5592 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
| 5593 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
| 5594 scripts. | |
| 5595 | |
| 5596 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
| 5597 information about the support for a particular language. | |
| 5598 You specify the language as an argument. | |
| 5599 | |
| 5600 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
| 5601 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
| 5602 first dash. | |
| 5603 | |
| 5604 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
| 5605 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
| 5606 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
| 5607 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
| 5608 | |
| 5609 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
| 5610 B big5 (Chinese) | |
| 5611 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
| 5612 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
| 5613 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
| 5614 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
| 5615 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
| 5616 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
| 5617 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
| 5618 R koi8 (Russian) | |
| 5619 Q tibetan | |
| 5620 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
| 5621 T lao | |
| 5622 T tis620 (Thai) | |
| 5623 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
| 5624 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
| 5625 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
| 5626 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
| 5627 z hz (Chinese) | |
| 5628 | |
| 5629 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
| 5630 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
| 5631 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
| 5632 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
| 5633 | |
| 5634 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
| 5635 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
| 5636 | |
| 5637 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
| 5638 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
| 5639 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
| 5640 Rmail files themselves. | |
| 5641 | |
| 5642 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
| 5643 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
| 5644 | |
| 5645 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
| 5646 for sending mail: | |
| 5647 | |
| 5648 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
| 5649 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
| 5650 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
| 5651 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
| 5652 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
| 5653 | |
| 5654 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
| 5655 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
| 5656 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
| 5657 translations. | |
| 5658 | |
| 5659 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
| 5660 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
| 5661 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
| 5662 without any conversion. | |
| 5663 | |
| 5664 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
| 5665 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
| 5666 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
| 5667 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
| 5668 | |
| 5669 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
| 5670 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
| 5671 | |
| 5672 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
| 5673 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
| 5674 | |
| 5675 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
| 5676 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
| 5677 | |
| 5678 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
| 5679 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
| 5680 in the buffer before point. | |
| 5681 | |
| 5682 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
| 5683 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
| 5684 you are using. | |
| 5685 | |
| 5686 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
| 5687 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
| 5688 | |
| 5689 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
| 5690 | |
| 5691 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
| 5692 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
| 5693 | |
| 5694 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
| 5695 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
| 5696 can become a bottleneck. | |
| 5697 | |
| 5698 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
| 5699 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
| 5700 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
| 5701 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
| 5702 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
| 5703 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
| 5704 | |
| 5705 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
| 5706 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
| 5707 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
| 5708 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
| 5709 | |
| 5710 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
| 5711 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
| 5712 show-paren-mode. | |
| 5713 | |
| 5714 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
| 5715 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
| 5716 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
| 5717 | |
| 5718 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
| 5719 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
| 5720 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
| 5721 | |
| 5722 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
| 5723 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
| 5724 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
| 5725 | |
| 5726 ** Changes in View mode. | |
| 5727 | |
| 5728 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
| 5729 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
| 5730 | |
| 5731 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
| 5732 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
| 5733 | |
| 5734 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
| 5735 previous state. | |
| 5736 | |
| 5737 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
| 5738 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
| 5739 | |
| 5740 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
| 5741 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
| 5742 not just the selected window. | |
| 5743 | |
| 5744 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
| 5745 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
| 5746 turns View mode on or off. | |
| 5747 | |
| 5748 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
| 5749 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
| 5750 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
| 5751 | |
| 5752 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
| 5753 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
| 5754 | |
| 5755 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
| 5756 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
| 5757 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
| 5758 which version to compare with. | |
| 5759 | |
| 5760 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
| 26264 | 5761 blocks if a match is inside the block. |
| 25853 | 5762 |
| 5763 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
| 5764 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
| 5765 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
| 5766 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
| 5767 | |
| 5768 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
| 5769 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
| 5770 blocks, all of them or none. | |
| 5771 | |
| 5772 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
| 5773 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
| 5774 confirmation first. | |
| 5775 | |
| 5776 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
| 5777 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
| 5778 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
| 5779 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
| 5780 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
| 5781 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
| 5782 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
| 5783 | |
| 5784 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
| 5785 | |
| 5786 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
| 5787 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
| 5788 | |
| 5789 ** M-x occur changes. | |
| 5790 | |
| 5791 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
| 5792 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
| 5793 | |
| 5794 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
| 5795 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
| 5796 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
| 5797 | |
| 5798 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
| 5799 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
| 5800 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
| 5801 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
| 5802 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
| 5803 | |
| 5804 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
| 5805 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
| 5806 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
| 5807 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
| 5808 | |
| 5809 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
| 5810 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
| 5811 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 ** Outline mode changes. | |
| 5814 | |
| 5815 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
| 5816 | |
| 5817 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
| 5818 | |
| 5819 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
| 5820 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
| 5821 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
| 5822 was already active. | |
| 5823 | |
| 5824 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
| 5825 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
| 5826 get confused by it. | |
| 5827 | |
| 5828 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
| 5829 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
| 5830 | |
| 5831 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
| 5832 | |
| 5833 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
| 5834 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
| 5835 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
| 5836 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
| 5837 | |
| 5838 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
| 5839 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
| 5840 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
| 5841 | |
| 5842 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
| 5843 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
| 5844 values. | |
| 5845 | |
| 5846 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
| 5847 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
| 5848 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
| 5849 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
| 5850 | |
| 5851 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
| 5852 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
| 5853 can be. The default value is 30. | |
| 5854 | |
| 5855 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
| 5856 | |
| 5857 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
| 5858 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
| 5859 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
| 5860 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
| 5861 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
| 5862 behavior. | |
| 5863 | |
| 5864 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
| 5865 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
| 5866 | |
| 5867 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
| 5868 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
| 5869 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
| 5870 buffer that shows the original message. | |
| 5871 | |
| 5872 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
| 5873 with separator lines around the contents. | |
| 5874 | |
| 5875 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
| 5876 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
| 5877 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
| 5878 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
| 5879 | |
| 5880 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
| 5881 | |
| 5882 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
| 5883 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
| 5884 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
| 5885 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
| 5886 | |
| 5887 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
| 5888 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
| 5889 /etc/passwd. | |
| 5890 | |
| 5891 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
| 5892 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
| 5893 /etc/passwd. | |
| 5894 | |
| 5895 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
| 5896 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
| 5897 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
| 5898 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
| 5899 | |
| 5900 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
| 5901 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
| 5902 be taken to be magic. | |
| 5903 | |
| 5904 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
| 5905 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
| 5906 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
| 5907 | |
| 5908 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
| 5909 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
| 5910 | |
| 5911 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
| 5912 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
| 5913 | |
| 5914 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
| 5915 | |
| 5916 new key dired.el binding old key | |
| 5917 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
| 5918 * c dired-change-marks c | |
| 5919 * m dired-mark m | |
| 5920 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
| 5921 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
| 5922 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
| 5923 * u dired-unmark u | |
| 5924 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
| 5925 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
| 5926 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
| 5927 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
| 5928 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
| 5929 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
| 5930 | |
| 5931 ** Rmail changes. | |
| 5932 | |
| 5933 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
| 5934 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
| 5935 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
| 5936 each time you run it. | |
| 5937 | |
| 5938 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
| 5939 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
| 5940 | |
| 5941 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
| 5942 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
| 5943 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
| 5944 | |
| 5945 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
| 5946 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
| 5947 | |
| 5948 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
| 5949 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
| 5950 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
| 5951 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
| 5952 for output. | |
| 5953 | |
| 5954 ** Gnus changes. | |
| 5955 | |
| 5956 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
| 5957 | |
| 26264 | 5958 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
| 5959 Gnus. | |
| 5960 | |
| 5961 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
| 25853 | 5962 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
| 5963 | |
| 5964 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
| 5965 article mode line. | |
| 5966 | |
| 5967 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
| 5968 | |
| 5969 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
| 5970 | |
| 5971 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
| 5972 | |
| 5973 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
| 5974 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
| 5975 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
| 5976 | |
| 5977 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
| 5978 | |
| 5979 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
| 5980 | |
| 5981 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
| 5982 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
| 5983 | |
| 5984 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
| 5985 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
| 5986 used to pick articles. | |
| 5987 | |
| 5988 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
| 5989 another have been added. | |
| 5990 | |
| 5991 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
| 5992 | |
| 5993 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
| 5994 generating lines in buffers. | |
| 5995 | |
| 5996 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
| 5997 `M-C-_'. | |
| 5998 | |
| 5999 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
| 6000 | |
| 6001 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
| 6002 | |
| 6003 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
| 6004 | |
| 6005 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
| 26264 | 6006 |
| 25853 | 6007 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
| 6008 | |
| 6009 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
| 6010 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
| 6011 | |
| 6012 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
| 6013 the native server. | |
| 6014 | |
| 6015 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
| 6016 | |
| 6017 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
| 6018 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
| 6019 | |
| 6020 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
| 6021 | |
| 6022 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
| 6023 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
| 6024 | |
| 6025 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
| 6026 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
| 6027 | |
| 6028 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
| 6029 a group. | |
| 6030 | |
| 6031 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
| 6032 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
| 6033 | |
| 6034 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
| 6035 | |
| 6036 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
| 6037 | |
| 6038 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
| 6039 | |
| 6040 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
| 26264 | 6041 |
| 25853 | 6042 Use the `Y c' command. |
| 6043 | |
| 6044 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
| 6045 | |
| 6046 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
| 6047 | |
| 6048 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
| 6049 | |
| 6050 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
| 6051 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
| 26264 | 6052 |
| 25853 | 6053 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
| 6054 | |
| 6055 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
| 6056 | |
| 6057 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
| 6058 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
| 6059 | |
| 6060 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
| 6061 | |
| 6062 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
| 6063 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
| 6064 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
| 6065 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
| 6066 this issue.) | |
| 6067 | |
| 6068 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
| 6069 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
| 6070 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
| 6071 | |
| 6072 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
| 6073 | |
| 6074 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
| 6075 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
| 6076 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
| 6077 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
| 6078 for reading and posting). | |
| 6079 | |
| 6080 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
| 6081 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
| 6082 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
| 6083 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
| 6084 there. | |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
| 6087 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
| 6088 | |
| 6089 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
| 6090 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
| 6091 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
| 6092 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
| 6093 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
| 6094 | |
| 6095 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
| 6096 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
| 6097 | |
| 6098 ** CC mode changes. | |
| 6099 | |
| 6100 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
| 6101 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
| 6102 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
| 6103 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
| 6104 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
| 6105 loaded. | |
| 6106 | |
| 6107 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
| 26264 | 6108 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
| 25853 | 6109 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
| 26264 | 6110 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
| 6111 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
| 25853 | 6112 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
| 6113 | |
| 6114 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
| 6115 of the current buffer. | |
| 6116 | |
| 6117 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
| 6118 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
| 6119 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
| 6120 | |
| 6121 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
| 6122 style that the Python developers like. | |
| 6123 | |
| 6124 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
| 6125 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
| 6126 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
| 6127 | |
| 6128 ** VC Changes [new] | |
| 6129 | |
| 6130 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
| 6131 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
| 6132 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
| 6133 | |
| 6134 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
| 6135 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
| 6136 developers. | |
| 6137 | |
| 6138 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
| 6139 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
| 6140 | |
| 6141 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
| 6142 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
| 6143 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
| 6144 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
| 6145 | |
| 6146 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
| 6147 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
| 6148 | |
| 6149 ** Calendar changes. | |
| 6150 | |
| 6151 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
| 6152 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
| 6153 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
| 6154 | |
| 6155 ** ps-print changes | |
| 6156 | |
| 26264 | 6157 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. |
| 25853 | 6158 |
| 6159 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
| 6160 | |
| 6161 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
| 6162 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
| 6163 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
| 6164 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
| 6165 It defaults to `letter'. | |
| 6166 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
| 6167 | |
| 6168 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
| 26264 | 6169 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, |
| 25853 | 6170 non-nil means "landscape" mode. |
| 6171 | |
| 6172 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
| 6173 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
| 26264 | 6174 It defaults to 1. |
| 25853 | 6175 |
| 6176 *** Horizontal layout | |
| 6177 | |
| 6178 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
| 6179 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
| 6180 All are measured in points. | |
| 6181 | |
| 6182 *** Vertical layout | |
| 6183 | |
| 6184 The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
| 6185 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
| 6186 All are measured in points. | |
| 6187 | |
| 6188 *** Headers | |
| 6189 | |
| 6190 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
| 6191 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
| 6192 margin above the text. | |
| 6193 | |
| 26264 | 6194 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy |
| 25853 | 6195 framing box is printed around the header. |
| 6196 | |
| 6197 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
| 6198 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
| 6199 | |
| 26264 | 6200 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', |
| 6201 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
| 25853 | 6202 `ps-header-font-size'. |
| 6203 | |
| 6204 *** Font managing | |
| 6205 | |
| 6206 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
| 6207 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
| 6208 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
| 6209 elements to this alist. | |
| 6210 | |
| 26264 | 6211 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font |
| 25853 | 6212 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. |
| 6213 | |
| 6214 ** hideshow changes. | |
| 6215 | |
| 6216 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
| 26264 | 6217 C++, ; for lisp). |
| 25853 | 6218 |
| 6219 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
| 6220 | |
| 6221 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
| 6222 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
| 6223 | |
| 6224 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | |
| 6225 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
| 6226 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
| 6227 | |
| 6228 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
| 6229 robust and a lot faster. | |
| 6230 | |
| 26264 | 6231 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
| 25853 | 6232 |
| 6233 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
| 6234 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
| 6235 documentation for more details. | |
| 6236 | |
| 6237 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
| 6238 | |
| 6239 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
| 6240 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
| 6241 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
| 6242 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
| 6243 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
| 6244 | |
| 6245 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
| 6246 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
| 6247 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
| 6248 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
| 6249 | |
| 6250 ** Font Lock mode | |
| 6251 | |
| 6252 *** Custom support | |
| 6253 | |
| 6254 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
| 6255 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
| 6256 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
| 6257 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
| 6258 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
| 6259 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
| 6260 | |
| 6261 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
| 6262 | |
| 6263 *** Maximum decoration | |
| 6264 | |
| 6265 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
| 6266 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
| 6267 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
| 6268 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
| 6269 to get the old behavior. | |
| 6270 | |
| 6271 *** New support | |
| 6272 | |
| 6273 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
| 6274 | |
| 6275 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
| 6276 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
| 6277 | |
| 6278 *** Configurable support | |
| 6279 | |
| 6280 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
| 6281 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
| 6282 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
| 6283 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
| 6284 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
| 6285 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
| 6286 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
| 6287 | |
| 6288 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
| 6289 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
| 6290 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
| 6291 | |
| 6292 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
| 6293 | |
| 6294 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
| 6295 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
| 6296 for any mode. | |
| 6297 | |
| 6298 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
| 6299 | |
| 6300 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
| 6301 | |
| 6302 in your ~/.emacs. | |
| 6303 | |
| 6304 *** New faces | |
| 6305 | |
| 6306 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
| 6307 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
| 6308 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
| 6309 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
| 6310 | |
| 6311 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
| 6312 | |
| 6313 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
| 6314 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
| 6315 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
| 6316 | |
| 6317 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
| 6318 | |
| 6319 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
| 6320 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
| 6321 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
| 6322 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
| 6323 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
| 6324 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
| 6325 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
| 6326 | |
| 6327 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
| 6328 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
| 6329 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
| 6330 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
| 6331 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
| 6332 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
| 6333 | |
| 6334 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
| 6335 | |
| 6336 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
| 6337 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
| 6338 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
| 6339 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
| 6340 | |
| 6341 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
| 6342 settings. | |
| 6343 | |
| 6344 ** Ada mode changes. | |
| 6345 | |
| 6346 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
| 6347 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
| 6348 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
| 6349 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
| 6350 stubs. | |
| 6351 | |
| 6352 *** There are two new commands: | |
| 6353 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
| 6354 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
| 6355 | |
| 6356 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
| 6357 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
| 26264 | 6358 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
| 25853 | 6359 |
| 6360 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
| 6361 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
| 6362 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
| 6363 | |
| 6364 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
| 6365 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
| 6366 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
| 6367 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
| 6368 | |
| 6369 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
| 6370 | |
| 6371 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
| 6372 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
| 6373 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
| 6374 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
| 6375 have any effect. | |
| 6376 | |
| 6377 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
| 6378 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
| 6379 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
| 6380 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
| 6381 | |
| 6382 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
| 6383 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
| 6384 | |
|
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6385 ** Changes to the emacsclient program |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6386 |
| 27475 | 6387 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
| 6388 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
| 6389 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
| 6390 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
| 6391 | |
|
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6392 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
| 25853 | 6393 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
| 6394 buffer in Emacs. | |
| 6395 | |
|
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6396 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6397 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6398 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6399 option takes precedence. |
|
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
6400 |
| 25853 | 6401 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
| 6402 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
| 6403 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
| 6404 | |
| 6405 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
| 6406 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
| 6407 the current defun. | |
| 6408 | |
| 6409 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
| 6410 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
| 6411 | |
| 6412 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
| 6413 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
| 6414 necessary). | |
| 6415 | |
| 6416 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
| 6417 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
| 6418 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
| 6419 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
| 6420 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
| 6421 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
| 6422 | |
| 6423 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
| 6424 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
| 6425 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
| 6426 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
| 6427 | |
| 6428 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
| 6429 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
| 6430 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
| 6431 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
| 6432 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
| 6433 | |
| 6434 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
| 6435 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
| 6436 | |
| 6437 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
| 6438 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
| 6439 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
| 6440 | |
| 6441 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
| 6442 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
| 6443 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
| 6444 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
| 6445 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
| 6446 | |
| 6447 ** RefTeX mode | |
| 6448 | |
| 6449 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
| 6450 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
| 6451 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
| 6452 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
| 6453 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
| 6454 | |
| 26264 | 6455 C-c ( reftex-label |
| 25853 | 6456 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
| 6457 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
| 6458 | |
| 6459 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
| 6460 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
| 6461 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
| 6462 | |
| 6463 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
| 6464 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
| 6465 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
| 6466 | |
| 6467 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
| 6468 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
| 6469 | |
| 6470 C-c = reftex-toc | |
| 6471 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
| 6472 can quickly jump to every section. | |
| 26264 | 6473 |
| 25853 | 6474 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
| 6475 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
| 6476 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
| 6477 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
| 6478 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
| 6479 | |
| 6480 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 6481 | |
| 6482 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
| 6483 | |
| 6484 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
| 6485 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
| 6486 | |
| 6487 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
| 6488 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
| 6489 | |
| 6490 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
| 6491 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
| 6492 | |
| 6493 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
| 6494 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
| 6495 appropriate functions. | |
| 6496 | |
| 6497 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
| 6498 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
| 6499 | |
| 6500 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
| 6501 been cleaned. | |
| 6502 | |
| 6503 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
| 6504 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
| 6505 | |
| 6506 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
| 6507 shall be delimited. | |
| 6508 | |
| 6509 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
| 6510 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
| 6511 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
| 6512 | |
| 6513 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
| 6514 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
| 6515 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
| 6516 | |
| 6517 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
| 6518 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
| 6519 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
| 6520 documentation). | |
| 6521 | |
| 6522 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
| 6523 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
| 6524 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
| 6525 | |
| 6526 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
| 6527 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
| 6528 | |
| 6529 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
| 6530 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
| 6531 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
| 6532 | |
| 6533 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
| 6534 | |
| 6535 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
| 6536 | |
| 6537 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
| 6538 from alien sources. | |
| 6539 | |
| 6540 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
| 6541 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
| 6542 crossref entries. | |
| 6543 | |
| 6544 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
| 6545 region. | |
| 6546 | |
| 6547 *** Added support for imenu. | |
| 6548 | |
| 6549 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
| 6550 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
| 6551 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
| 6552 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
| 6553 | |
| 6554 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
| 6555 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
| 6556 | |
| 6557 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
| 6558 | |
| 27136 | 6559 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
| 27112 | 6560 |
| 25853 | 6561 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
| 6562 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
| 6563 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
| 6564 as an argument. | |
| 6565 | |
| 6566 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
| 6567 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
| 6568 | |
| 6569 ** browse-url changes | |
| 6570 | |
| 6571 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
| 6572 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
| 6573 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
| 6574 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
| 6575 customization variables. | |
| 6576 | |
| 6577 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
| 6578 | |
| 6579 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
| 6580 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
| 6581 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
| 6582 | |
| 6583 ** Changes in Ediff | |
| 6584 | |
| 6585 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
| 6586 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
| 6587 | |
| 6588 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
| 6589 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
| 6590 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
| 6591 directories). | |
| 6592 | |
| 6593 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
| 6594 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
| 6595 files in the same directory. | |
| 6596 | |
| 6597 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
| 6598 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
| 6599 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
| 6600 | |
| 6601 ** Changes in Viper | |
| 6602 | |
| 6603 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
| 26264 | 6604 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
| 25853 | 6605 instead of vip-. |
| 6606 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
| 26264 | 6607 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
| 25853 | 6608 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
| 6609 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
| 6610 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
| 6611 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
| 6612 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
| 6613 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
| 6614 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
| 6615 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
| 6616 | |
| 6617 ** Etags changes. | |
| 6618 | |
| 6619 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
| 6620 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
| 6621 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
| 6622 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
| 6623 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
| 6624 | |
| 6625 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
| 6626 | |
| 6627 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
| 6628 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
| 6629 | |
| 6630 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
| 6631 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
| 6632 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
| 6633 | |
| 6634 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
| 6635 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
| 6636 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
| 6637 methods and protocols. | |
| 6638 | |
| 6639 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
| 6640 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
| 6641 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
| 6642 paragraph name. | |
| 6643 | |
| 6644 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
| 6645 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
| 6646 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
| 6647 | |
| 6648 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
| 6649 in files has changed slightly. | |
| 6650 | |
| 6651 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
| 6652 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
| 6653 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
| 6654 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
| 6655 | |
| 6656 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
| 6657 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
| 6658 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
| 6659 reasons. | |
| 6660 | |
| 6661 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
| 6662 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
| 6663 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
| 6664 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
| 6665 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
| 6666 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
| 6667 | |
| 6668 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
| 6669 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
| 6670 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
| 6671 | |
| 6672 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
| 6673 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
| 6674 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
| 6675 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
| 6676 | |
| 6677 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
| 6678 details. | |
| 6679 | |
| 6680 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
| 6681 | |
| 6682 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
| 6683 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
| 6684 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
| 6685 | |
| 6686 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
| 6687 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
| 6688 into Emacs. | |
| 6689 | |
| 6690 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
| 6691 | |
| 6692 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
| 6693 | |
| 6694 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
| 6695 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
| 6696 | |
| 6697 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
| 6698 | |
| 6699 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
| 6700 in shell buffers. | |
| 6701 | |
| 6702 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
| 6703 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
| 6704 and `elint-defun'. | |
| 6705 | |
| 6706 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
| 6707 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
| 6708 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
| 6709 strings or comments. | |
| 6710 | |
| 6711 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
| 6712 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
| 6713 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
| 6714 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
| 6715 at these points. | |
| 6716 | |
| 6717 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
| 6718 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
| 6719 | |
| 6720 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
| 6721 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
| 6722 | |
| 6723 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
| 6724 | |
| 6725 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
| 6726 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
| 6727 | |
| 6728 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
| 6729 | |
| 6730 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
| 6731 | |
| 6732 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
| 6733 | |
| 6734 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
| 6735 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
| 6736 | |
| 6737 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
| 6738 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
| 6739 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
| 6740 original place after inserting the copy. | |
| 6741 | |
| 6742 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
| 6743 on the buffer. | |
| 6744 | |
| 6745 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
| 6746 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
| 6747 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
| 6748 | |
| 6749 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
| 6750 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
| 6751 -or- | |
| 6752 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
| 6753 | |
| 6754 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
| 6755 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
| 6756 | |
| 6757 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
| 6758 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
| 6759 | |
| 6760 *** ogonek | |
| 6761 | |
| 6762 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
| 6763 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
| 6764 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
| 6765 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
| 6766 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
| 6767 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
| 6768 instance) and vice versa. | |
| 6769 | |
| 6770 To use this package load it using | |
| 6771 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
| 6772 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
| 26264 | 6773 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
| 25853 | 6774 M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
| 6775 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
| 6776 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
| 6777 | |
| 6778 *** Interface to ph. | |
| 6779 | |
| 6780 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
| 6781 | |
| 6782 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
| 6783 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
| 6784 these servers. | |
| 6785 | |
| 6786 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
| 6787 | |
| 6788 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
| 6789 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
| 6790 while the real cursor does not move. | |
| 6791 | |
| 6792 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
| 6793 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
| 6794 | |
| 6795 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
| 6796 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
| 6797 | |
| 6798 ** movemail change | |
| 6799 | |
| 6800 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
| 6801 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
| 6802 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
| 6803 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
| 6804 | |
| 6805 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
| 6806 | |
| 6807 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
| 6808 | |
| 6809 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
| 6810 | |
| 6811 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
| 6812 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
| 6813 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
| 6814 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
| 6815 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
| 6816 | |
| 6817 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
| 6818 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
| 6819 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
| 6820 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
| 6821 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
| 6822 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
| 6823 | |
| 6824 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
| 6825 | |
| 6826 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
| 6827 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
| 6828 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
| 6829 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
| 6830 | |
| 6831 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
| 6832 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
| 6833 | |
| 6834 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
| 6835 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
| 6836 "win". | |
| 6837 | |
| 6838 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
| 6839 | |
| 6840 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
| 6841 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
| 6842 | |
| 6843 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
| 6844 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
| 6845 or by the user. | |
| 6846 | |
| 6847 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
| 6848 | |
| 6849 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
| 6850 | |
| 6851 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
| 6852 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
| 6853 | |
| 6854 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
| 6855 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
| 6856 its argument. | |
| 6857 | |
| 6858 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
| 6859 | |
| 6860 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
| 6861 | |
| 6862 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
| 6863 | |
| 6864 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
| 6865 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
| 6866 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
| 6867 `format' function. | |
| 6868 | |
| 6869 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
| 6870 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
| 6871 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
| 6872 | |
| 6873 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
| 6874 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
| 6875 adding one of these suffixes. | |
| 6876 | |
| 6877 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
| 6878 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
| 26264 | 6879 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
| 25853 | 6880 |
| 6881 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
| 6882 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
| 6883 | |
| 6884 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
| 6885 | |
| 6886 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
| 6887 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
| 6888 | |
| 6889 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
| 6890 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
| 6891 | |
| 6892 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
| 6893 | |
| 6894 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
| 6895 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
| 6896 | |
| 6897 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
| 6898 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
| 6899 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
| 6900 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
| 6901 | |
| 6902 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
| 6903 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
| 6904 of the last form. | |
| 6905 | |
| 6906 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
| 6907 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
| 6908 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
| 6909 as the last form. | |
| 6910 | |
| 6911 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
| 6912 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
| 6913 matches. | |
| 6914 | |
| 6915 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
| 6916 | |
| 6917 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
| 6918 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
| 6919 Then it returns that string. | |
| 6920 | |
| 6921 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
| 6922 | |
| 6923 (with-output-to-string | |
| 6924 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
| 6925 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
| 6926 | |
| 6927 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
| 6928 | |
| 6929 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
| 6930 is non-nil. | |
| 6931 | |
| 6932 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
| 6933 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
| 6934 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
| 6935 | |
| 6936 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
| 6937 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
| 6938 | |
| 6939 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
| 6940 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
| 6941 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
| 6942 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
| 6943 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
| 6944 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
| 6945 | |
| 6946 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
| 6947 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
| 6948 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
| 6949 characters". | |
| 6950 | |
| 6951 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
| 6952 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
| 6953 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
| 6954 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
| 6955 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
| 6956 | |
| 6957 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
| 6958 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
| 6959 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
| 6960 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
| 6961 | |
| 6962 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
| 6963 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
| 6964 | |
| 6965 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
| 26264 | 6966 |
| 25853 | 6967 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
| 6968 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
| 6969 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
| 6970 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
| 6971 guaranteed. | |
| 6972 | |
| 6973 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
| 6974 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
| 6975 character). | |
| 6976 | |
| 6977 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
| 6978 | |
| 6979 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
| 6980 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
| 6981 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
| 6982 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
| 6983 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
| 6984 | |
| 6985 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
| 6986 | |
| 6987 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
| 6988 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
| 6989 more than the number of characters. | |
| 6990 | |
| 6991 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
| 6992 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
| 6993 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
| 6994 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
| 6995 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
| 6996 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
| 6997 | |
| 6998 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
| 6999 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
| 7000 | |
| 7001 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
| 7002 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
| 7003 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
| 7004 character, sref signals an error. | |
| 7005 | |
| 7006 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
| 7007 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
| 7008 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
| 7009 | |
| 7010 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
| 7011 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
| 7012 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
| 7013 | |
| 7014 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
| 7015 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
| 7016 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
| 7017 | |
| 7018 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
| 7019 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
| 7020 | |
| 7021 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
| 7022 | |
| 7023 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
| 7024 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
| 7025 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
| 7026 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
| 7027 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
| 7028 | |
| 7029 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
| 7030 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
| 7031 | |
| 7032 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
| 7033 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
| 7034 | |
| 7035 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
| 7036 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
| 7037 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
| 7038 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
| 7039 | |
| 7040 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
| 7041 | |
| 7042 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
| 7043 | |
| 7044 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
| 7045 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
| 7046 are not included in the resulting value. | |
| 7047 | |
| 7048 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
| 7049 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
| 7050 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
| 7051 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
| 7052 | |
| 7053 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
| 7054 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
| 7055 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
| 7056 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
| 7057 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
| 7058 column START-COLUMN. | |
| 7059 | |
| 7060 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
| 7061 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
| 7062 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
| 7063 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
| 7064 changed text, before the change. | |
| 7065 | |
| 7066 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
| 7067 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
| 7068 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
| 7069 | |
| 7070 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
| 7071 | |
| 7072 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
| 7073 | |
| 7074 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
| 7075 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
| 7076 | |
| 7077 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
| 7078 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
| 7079 which identify the character within that character set. | |
| 7080 | |
| 7081 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
| 7082 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
| 7083 opposite of split-char. | |
| 7084 | |
| 7085 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
| 7086 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
| 7087 | |
| 7088 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
| 7089 of all the characters in a string. | |
| 7090 | |
| 7091 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
| 7092 and specifying coding systems. | |
| 7093 | |
| 7094 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
| 7095 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
| 7096 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
| 7097 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
| 7098 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
| 7099 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
| 7100 | |
| 7101 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
| 7102 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
| 7103 | |
| 7104 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
| 7105 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
| 7106 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
| 7107 | |
| 7108 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
| 7109 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
| 7110 to match against a file name. | |
| 7111 | |
| 7112 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
| 7113 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
| 7114 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
| 7115 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
| 7116 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
| 7117 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
| 7118 | |
| 7119 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
| 7120 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
| 7121 | |
| 7122 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
| 7123 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
| 7124 | |
| 7125 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
| 7126 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
| 7127 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
| 7128 service names. | |
| 7129 | |
| 7130 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
| 7131 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
| 7132 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
| 7133 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
| 7134 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
| 7135 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
| 7136 | |
| 7137 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
| 7138 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
| 7139 | |
| 7140 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
| 7141 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
| 7142 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
| 7143 start the subprocess. | |
| 7144 | |
| 7145 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
| 7146 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
| 7147 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
| 7148 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
| 7149 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
| 7150 | |
| 7151 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
| 7152 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
| 7153 subprocess. | |
| 7154 | |
| 7155 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
| 7156 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
| 7157 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
| 7158 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
| 7159 | |
| 7160 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
| 7161 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
| 7162 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
| 7163 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
| 7164 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
| 7165 system for one operation at a time. | |
| 7166 | |
| 7167 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
| 7168 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
| 7169 | |
| 7170 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
| 7171 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
| 7172 The value is a cons cell, | |
| 7173 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
| 7174 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
| 7175 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
| 7176 input to the subprocess. | |
| 7177 | |
| 7178 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
| 7179 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
| 7180 | |
| 7181 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
| 7182 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
| 7183 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
| 7184 | |
| 7185 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
| 7186 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
| 7187 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
| 7188 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
| 7189 customization. | |
| 7190 | |
| 7191 Thus, instead of writing | |
| 7192 | |
| 7193 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
| 7194 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
| 7195 | |
| 7196 you would now write this: | |
| 7197 | |
| 7198 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
| 7199 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
| 7200 :type 'boolean | |
| 7201 :group foo) | |
| 7202 | |
| 7203 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
| 7204 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
| 7205 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
| 7206 for a description of them. | |
| 7207 | |
| 7208 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
| 7209 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
| 7210 | |
| 7211 (defgroup ispell nil | |
| 7212 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
| 7213 :group 'processes) | |
| 7214 | |
| 7215 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
| 7216 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
| 7217 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
| 7218 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
| 7219 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
| 7220 | |
| 7221 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
| 7222 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
| 7223 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
| 7224 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
| 7225 first-level subgroups. | |
| 7226 | |
| 7227 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
| 7228 | |
| 7229 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
| 7230 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
| 7231 | |
| 7232 ** easy-mmode | |
| 7233 | |
| 7234 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
| 7235 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
| 7236 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
| 7237 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
| 7238 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
| 7239 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
| 7240 | |
| 7241 ** Text property changes | |
| 7242 | |
| 7243 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
| 7244 text property. | |
| 7245 | |
| 7246 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
| 7247 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
| 7248 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
| 7249 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
| 7250 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
| 7251 | |
| 7252 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
| 7253 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
| 7254 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
| 7255 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
| 7256 | |
| 7257 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
| 7258 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
| 7259 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
| 7260 | |
| 7261 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
| 7262 | |
| 7263 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
| 7264 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
| 7265 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
| 7266 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
| 7267 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
| 7268 make the overlay visible. | |
| 7269 | |
| 7270 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
| 7271 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
| 7272 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
| 7273 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
| 7274 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
| 7275 t when it should hide it. | |
| 7276 | |
| 7277 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
| 7278 | |
| 7279 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
| 26264 | 7280 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
| 7281 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
| 25853 | 7282 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
| 26264 | 7283 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
| 25853 | 7284 Here is an example of how to do this: |
| 7285 | |
| 7286 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
| 26264 | 7287 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
| 25853 | 7288 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
| 26264 | 7289 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
| 25853 | 7290 |
| 7291 ... | |
| 7292 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
| 7293 | |
| 7294 ... | |
| 7295 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
| 7296 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
| 7297 ;; Or respectively: | |
| 7298 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
| 7299 | |
| 7300 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
| 7301 | |
| 7302 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
| 7303 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
| 7304 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
| 7305 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
| 7306 | |
| 7307 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
| 7308 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
| 7309 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
| 7310 | |
| 7311 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
| 7312 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
| 7313 | |
| 7314 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
| 7315 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
| 7316 | |
| 7317 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
| 7318 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
| 7319 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
| 7320 | |
| 7321 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
| 7322 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
| 7323 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
| 7324 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
| 7325 | |
| 7326 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
| 7327 of the current buffer. | |
| 7328 | |
| 7329 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
| 7330 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
| 7331 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
| 7332 | |
| 7333 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
| 7334 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
| 7335 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
| 7336 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
| 7337 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
| 7338 | |
| 7339 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
| 7340 text property. | |
| 7341 | |
| 7342 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
| 7343 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
| 7344 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
| 7345 | |
| 7346 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
| 7347 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
| 7348 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
| 7349 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
| 7350 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
| 7351 | |
| 7352 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
| 7353 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
| 7354 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
| 7355 | |
| 7356 ** Changes in face features | |
| 7357 | |
| 7358 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
| 7359 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
| 7360 | |
| 7361 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
| 7362 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
| 7363 | |
| 7364 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
| 7365 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
| 7366 | |
| 7367 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
| 7368 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
| 7369 | |
| 7370 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
| 7371 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
| 7372 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
| 7373 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
| 7374 overlay property). | |
| 7375 | |
| 7376 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
| 7377 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
| 7378 | |
| 7379 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
| 7380 | |
| 7381 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
| 7382 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
| 7383 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
| 7384 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
| 7385 | |
| 7386 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
| 7387 begins with ~. | |
| 7388 | |
| 7389 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
| 7390 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
| 7391 | |
| 7392 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
| 7393 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
| 7394 | |
| 7395 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
| 7396 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
| 7397 | |
| 7398 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
| 7399 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
| 7400 | |
| 7401 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
| 7402 (formerly it did not). | |
| 7403 | |
| 7404 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
| 7405 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
| 7406 | |
| 7407 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
| 7408 instead of constant strings. | |
| 7409 | |
| 7410 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
| 7411 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
| 7412 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
| 7413 | |
| 7414 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
| 7415 in the same way as before. | |
| 7416 | |
| 7417 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
| 7418 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
| 7419 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
| 7420 | |
| 7421 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
| 7422 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
| 7423 else, and returns nil. | |
| 7424 | |
| 7425 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
| 7426 directory cannot be listed. | |
| 7427 | |
| 7428 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
| 7429 | |
| 7430 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
| 7431 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
| 7432 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
| 7433 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
| 7434 ways: | |
| 7435 | |
| 7436 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
| 7437 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
| 7438 | |
| 7439 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
| 7440 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
| 7441 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
| 7442 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
| 7443 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
| 7444 | |
| 7445 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
| 7446 argument in this way. | |
| 7447 | |
| 7448 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
| 7449 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
| 7450 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
| 7451 | |
| 7452 ** Echo area features | |
| 7453 | |
| 7454 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
| 7455 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
| 7456 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
| 7457 after the echo area is cleared. | |
| 7458 | |
| 7459 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
| 7460 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
| 7461 | |
| 7462 ** Keyboard input features | |
| 7463 | |
| 7464 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
| 7465 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
| 7466 | |
| 7467 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
| 7468 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
| 7469 by keyboard macros. | |
| 7470 | |
| 7471 ** Frame-related changes | |
| 7472 | |
| 7473 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
| 7474 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
| 7475 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
| 7476 | |
| 7477 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
| 7478 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
| 7479 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
| 7480 | |
| 7481 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
| 7482 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
| 7483 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
| 7484 in the selected frame. | |
| 7485 | |
| 7486 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
| 7487 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
| 7488 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
| 7489 | |
| 7490 ** X Windows features | |
| 7491 | |
| 7492 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
| 7493 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
| 7494 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
| 7495 | |
| 7496 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
| 7497 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
| 7498 | |
| 7499 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
| 7500 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
| 7501 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
| 7502 | |
| 7503 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
| 7504 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
| 7505 | |
| 7506 ** Subprocess features | |
| 7507 | |
| 7508 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
| 7509 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
| 7510 automatically. | |
| 7511 | |
| 7512 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
| 7513 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
| 7514 | |
| 7515 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
| 7516 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
| 7517 | |
| 7518 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
| 7519 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
| 7520 | |
| 7521 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
| 7522 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
| 7523 goes after the other menu items. | |
| 7524 | |
| 7525 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
| 26264 | 7526 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
| 25853 | 7527 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
| 7528 are in use. | |
| 7529 | |
| 7530 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
| 7531 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
| 7532 | |
| 7533 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
| 7534 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
| 7535 form. | |
| 7536 | |
| 7537 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
| 7538 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
| 7539 but its hook is still run. | |
| 7540 | |
| 7541 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
| 7542 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
| 7543 | |
| 7544 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
| 7545 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
| 7546 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
| 7547 | |
| 7548 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
| 7549 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
| 7550 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
| 7551 warned. | |
| 7552 | |
| 7553 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
| 7554 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
| 7555 | |
| 7556 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
| 7557 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
| 7558 functions like display-time. | |
| 7559 | |
| 7560 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
| 7561 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
| 7562 | |
| 7563 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
| 7564 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
| 7565 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
| 7566 | |
| 7567 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
| 7568 if there is an error in compilation. | |
| 7569 | |
| 7570 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
| 7571 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
| 7572 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
| 7573 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
| 7574 | |
| 7575 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
| 7576 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
| 7577 the *scratch* buffer. | |
| 7578 | |
| 7579 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
| 7580 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
| 7581 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
| 7582 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
| 7583 | |
| 7584 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
| 7585 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
| 7586 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
| 7587 | |
| 7588 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
| 7589 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
| 7590 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
| 7591 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
| 7592 | |
| 7593 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
| 7594 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
| 7595 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
| 7596 | |
| 7597 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
| 7598 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
| 7599 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
| 7600 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
| 7601 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
| 7602 files at all. | |
| 7603 | |
| 7604 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
| 7605 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
| 7606 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
| 7607 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
| 7608 | |
| 7609 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
| 7610 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
| 7611 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
| 7612 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
| 7613 | |
| 7614 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
| 7615 | |
| 7616 ** imenu.el changes. | |
| 7617 | |
| 7618 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
| 26264 | 7619 item from menu created by imenu. |
| 25853 | 7620 |
| 7621 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
| 7622 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
| 7623 select one of those items. | |
| 7624 | |
| 7625 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
| 7626 | |
| 7627 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
| 7628 | |
| 7629 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
| 7630 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
| 7631 | |
| 7632 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
| 7633 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
| 7634 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
| 7635 | |
| 7636 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
| 7637 | |
| 7638 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
| 7639 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
| 7640 | |
| 7641 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
| 7642 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
| 7643 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
| 7644 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
| 7645 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
| 7646 all caps. | |
| 7647 | |
| 7648 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
| 7649 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
| 7650 | |
| 7651 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
| 7652 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
| 7653 as in previous Emacs versions. | |
| 7654 | |
| 7655 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
| 7656 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
| 7657 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
| 7658 frames. | |
| 7659 | |
| 7660 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
| 7661 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
| 7662 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
| 7663 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
| 7664 accident. | |
| 7665 | |
| 7666 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
| 7667 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
| 7668 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
| 7669 line and then executing the macro. | |
| 7670 | |
| 7671 This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
| 7672 | |
| 7673 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
| 7674 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
| 7675 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
| 7676 characters. | |
| 7677 | |
| 7678 ** Font Lock mode | |
| 7679 | |
| 7680 *** Font Lock support modes | |
| 7681 | |
| 7682 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
| 7683 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
| 7684 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
| 7685 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
| 7686 Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
| 7687 | |
| 7688 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
| 7689 | |
| 7690 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
| 7691 | |
| 7692 in your ~/.emacs. | |
| 7693 | |
| 7694 *** lazy-lock | |
| 7695 | |
| 7696 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
| 7697 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
| 7698 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
| 7699 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
| 7700 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
| 7701 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
| 7702 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
| 7703 | |
| 7704 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
| 7705 | |
| 7706 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
| 7707 | |
| 7708 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | |
| 7709 | |
| 7710 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 7711 | |
| 7712 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
| 7713 paren and key. | |
| 7714 | |
| 7715 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
| 7716 supported. | |
| 7717 | |
| 7718 ** Gnus changes. | |
| 7719 | |
| 7720 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
| 7721 commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
| 7722 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
| 7723 previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
| 7724 | |
| 7725 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
| 7726 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
| 7727 | |
| 26264 | 7728 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
| 25853 | 7729 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
| 7730 obsolete. | |
| 7731 | |
| 7732 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
| 7733 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
| 7734 | |
| 7735 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
| 7736 | |
| 7737 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
| 7738 | |
| 7739 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
| 7740 | |
| 7741 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
| 26264 | 7742 referred. |
| 25853 | 7743 |
| 7744 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
| 7745 | |
| 7746 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
| 7747 | |
| 7748 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
| 7749 | |
| 7750 (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
| 7751 | |
| 7752 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
| 26264 | 7753 buffers. |
| 25853 | 7754 |
| 7755 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
| 7756 | |
| 7757 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
| 7758 | |
| 7759 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
| 7760 | |
| 7761 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
| 7762 | |
| 7763 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
| 7764 | |
| 7765 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
| 7766 | |
| 7767 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
| 7768 | |
| 7769 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
| 7770 is possible. | |
| 7771 | |
| 7772 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
| 7773 | |
| 7774 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
| 7775 groups of groups. | |
| 7776 | |
| 7777 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
| 7778 | |
| 7779 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
| 26264 | 7780 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
| 25853 | 7781 |
| 7782 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
| 7783 | |
| 7784 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
| 7785 | |
| 7786 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
| 7787 | |
| 7788 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
| 7789 | |
| 7790 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
| 7791 expiration times. | |
| 7792 | |
| 7793 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
| 7794 | |
| 7795 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
| 7796 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
| 7797 | |
| 7798 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
| 7799 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
| 7800 bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
| 7801 | |
| 7802 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
| 7803 articles with the `*' command. | |
| 7804 | |
| 7805 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
| 7806 | |
| 7807 *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
| 7808 | |
| 7809 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
| 7810 | |
| 7811 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
| 7812 | |
| 26264 | 7813 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
| 25853 | 7814 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
| 7815 | |
| 7816 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
| 26264 | 7817 buffer. |
| 25853 | 7818 |
| 7819 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
| 7820 | |
| 7821 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
| 7822 | |
| 7823 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
| 7824 | |
| 7825 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
| 7826 | |
| 26264 | 7827 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
| 25853 | 7828 |
| 7829 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
| 7830 | |
| 26264 | 7831 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
| 25853 | 7832 |
| 7833 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
| 7834 | |
| 26264 | 7835 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
| 7836 | |
| 7837 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | |
| 25853 | 7838 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
| 7839 | |
| 7840 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
| 26264 | 7841 refetching. |
| 25853 | 7842 |
| 7843 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
| 7844 | |
| 7845 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
| 7846 buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
| 7847 | |
| 7848 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
| 7849 | |
| 7850 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
| 7851 | |
| 7852 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
| 7853 | |
| 7854 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
| 26264 | 7855 articles. |
| 25853 | 7856 |
| 7857 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
| 7858 | |
| 26264 | 7859 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
| 25853 | 7860 |
| 7861 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
| 7862 cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
| 7863 | |
| 7864 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
| 7865 | |
| 7866 *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
| 7867 | |
| 7868 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
| 7869 | |
| 7870 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
| 7871 | |
| 7872 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
| 7873 | |
| 7874 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
| 7875 in greater detail. | |
| 7876 | |
| 7877 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
| 7878 | |
| 7879 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
| 7880 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
| 7881 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
| 7882 exists. | |
| 7883 | |
| 7884 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
| 7885 as well as lists. | |
| 7886 | |
| 7887 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
| 7888 of a given keymap. | |
| 7889 | |
| 7890 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
| 7891 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
| 7892 keymap or nil. | |
| 7893 | |
| 7894 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
| 7895 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
| 7896 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
| 7897 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
| 7898 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
| 7899 alias. | |
| 7900 | |
| 7901 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
| 7902 | |
| 7903 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
| 7904 | |
| 7905 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
| 7906 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
| 7907 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
| 7908 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
| 7909 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
| 7910 | |
| 7911 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
| 7912 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
| 7913 `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
| 7914 | |
| 7915 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
| 7916 | |
| 7917 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
| 7918 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
| 7919 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
| 7920 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
| 7921 chapter of the manual for details. | |
| 7922 | |
| 7923 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
| 7924 customization variables take effect. | |
| 7925 | |
| 7926 ** Marking with the mouse. | |
| 7927 | |
| 7928 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
| 7929 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
| 7930 using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
| 7931 | |
| 7932 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
| 7933 | |
| 7934 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
| 7935 | |
| 7936 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
| 7937 to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
| 7938 | |
| 7939 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
| 7940 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
| 7941 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
| 7942 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
| 7943 applications, these problems are significant. | |
| 7944 | |
| 7945 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
| 7946 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
| 7947 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
| 7948 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
| 7949 other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
| 7950 | |
| 7951 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
| 7952 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
| 7953 | |
| 7954 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
| 7955 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
| 7956 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
| 7957 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
| 7958 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
| 7959 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
| 7960 | |
| 7961 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
| 7962 | |
| 7963 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
| 7964 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
| 7965 minibuffer contains. | |
| 7966 | |
| 7967 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
| 7968 | |
| 7969 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
| 7970 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
| 7971 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
| 7972 affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
| 7973 | |
| 7974 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
| 7975 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
| 7976 and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
| 7977 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
| 7978 | |
| 7979 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
| 7980 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
| 7981 | |
| 7982 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
| 7983 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
| 7984 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
| 7985 | |
| 7986 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
| 7987 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
| 7988 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
| 7989 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
| 7990 | |
| 7991 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
| 7992 | |
| 7993 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
| 7994 to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
| 7995 | |
| 7996 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
| 7997 | |
| 7998 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
| 7999 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
| 8000 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
| 8001 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
| 8002 immediately after the selected one. | |
| 8003 | |
| 8004 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
| 8005 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
| 8006 | |
| 8007 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
| 8008 | |
| 8009 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
| 8010 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
| 8011 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
| 8012 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
| 8013 recover-session. | |
| 8014 | |
| 8015 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
| 8016 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
| 8017 will not work. | |
| 8018 | |
| 8019 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
| 8020 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
| 8021 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
| 8022 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
| 8023 now that the bug is fixed. | |
| 8024 | |
| 8025 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
| 8026 | |
| 8027 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
| 8028 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
| 8029 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
| 8030 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
| 8031 | |
| 8032 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
| 8033 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
| 8034 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
| 8035 the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
| 8036 | |
| 8037 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
| 8038 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
| 8039 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
| 8040 | |
| 8041 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
| 8042 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
| 8043 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
| 8044 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
| 8045 remain normal. | |
| 8046 | |
| 8047 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
| 8048 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
| 8049 | |
| 8050 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
| 8051 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
| 8052 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
| 8053 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
| 8054 | |
| 8055 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
| 8056 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
| 8057 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
| 8058 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
| 8059 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
| 8060 `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
| 8061 | |
| 8062 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
| 8063 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
| 8064 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
| 8065 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
| 8066 | |
| 8067 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
| 8068 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
| 8069 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
| 8070 | |
| 8071 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
| 8072 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
| 8073 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
| 8074 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
| 8075 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
| 8076 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
| 8077 to a limitation in font-lock). | |
| 8078 | |
| 8079 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
| 8080 | |
| 8081 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
| 8082 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
| 8083 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
| 8084 this example: | |
| 8085 | |
| 8086 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
| 8087 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
| 8088 | |
| 8089 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
| 8090 | |
| 8091 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
| 8092 | |
| 8093 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
| 8094 | |
| 8095 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
| 8096 | |
| 8097 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
| 8098 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
| 8099 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
| 8100 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
| 8101 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
| 8102 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
| 8103 | |
| 8104 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
| 8105 does the same job. | |
| 8106 | |
| 8107 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
| 8108 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
| 8109 | |
| 8110 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
| 8111 text. | |
| 8112 | |
| 8113 ** Font Lock mode | |
| 8114 | |
| 8115 *** Global Font Lock mode | |
| 8116 | |
| 8117 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
| 8118 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
| 8119 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
| 8120 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
| 8121 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
| 8122 | |
| 8123 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
| 8124 | |
| 8125 (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
| 8126 | |
| 8127 in your ~/.emacs. | |
| 8128 | |
| 8129 *** Local Refontification | |
| 8130 | |
| 8131 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
| 8132 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
| 8133 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
| 8134 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
| 8135 | |
| 8136 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
| 8137 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
| 8138 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
| 8139 above and below point. | |
| 8140 | |
| 8141 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
| 8142 | |
| 8143 ** Follow mode | |
| 8144 | |
| 8145 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
| 8146 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
| 8147 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
| 8148 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
| 8149 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
| 8150 follow-mode. | |
| 8151 | |
| 8152 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
| 8153 | |
| 8154 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
| 8155 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
| 8156 | |
| 8157 ** hide-show changes. | |
| 8158 | |
| 8159 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
| 8160 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
| 8161 normal hooks. | |
| 8162 | |
| 8163 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
| 8164 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
| 8165 | |
| 8166 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
| 8167 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | |
| 8168 those that begin a function, record, or macro. | |
| 8169 | |
| 8170 ** MSDOS Changes | |
| 8171 | |
| 8172 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
| 8173 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
| 8174 | |
| 8175 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
| 8176 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
| 8177 | |
| 8178 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
| 8179 | |
| 8180 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
| 8181 pressing both mouse buttons. | |
| 8182 | |
| 8183 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
| 8184 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
| 26264 | 8185 are: |
| 25853 | 8186 |
| 8187 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
| 8188 now works. | |
| 8189 | |
| 8190 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
| 8191 | |
| 8192 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
| 8193 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
| 8194 | |
| 8195 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
| 8196 | |
| 8197 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
| 8198 | |
| 8199 **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
| 8200 | |
| 8201 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
| 8202 | |
| 8203 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
| 8204 | |
| 8205 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
| 8206 | |
| 8207 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
| 8208 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
| 8209 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
| 8210 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
| 8211 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
| 8212 | |
| 8213 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
| 8214 | |
| 8215 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
| 8216 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
| 8217 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
| 8218 be different. | |
| 8219 | |
| 8220 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
| 8221 than `system-type'. | |
| 8222 | |
| 8223 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
| 8224 | |
| 8225 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
| 8226 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
| 8227 | |
| 8228 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
| 8229 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
| 8230 | |
| 8231 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
| 8232 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
| 8233 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
| 8234 | |
| 8235 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
| 8236 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
| 8237 like this: | |
| 8238 | |
| 8239 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
| 8240 | |
| 8241 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
| 8242 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
| 8243 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
| 8244 | |
| 8245 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
| 8246 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
| 8247 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
| 8248 | |
| 8249 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
| 8250 up if too much time passes. | |
| 8251 | |
| 8252 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
| 8253 | |
| 8254 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
| 8255 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
| 8256 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
| 8257 form in BODY. | |
| 8258 | |
| 8259 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
| 8260 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
| 8261 call looks like this: | |
| 8262 | |
| 8263 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
| 8264 | |
| 8265 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
| 8266 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
| 8267 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
| 8268 ARGS. | |
| 8269 | |
| 8270 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
| 8271 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
| 8272 command. | |
| 8273 | |
| 8274 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
| 8275 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
| 8276 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
| 8277 each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
| 8278 | |
| 8279 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
| 8280 idle for SECS seconds. | |
| 8281 | |
| 8282 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
| 8283 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
| 8284 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
| 8285 instead. | |
| 8286 | |
| 8287 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
| 8288 there is no answer within a certain time. | |
| 8289 | |
| 8290 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
| 8291 | |
| 8292 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
| 8293 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
| 8294 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
| 8295 | |
| 8296 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
| 8297 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
| 8298 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
| 8299 arguments in between are ignored. | |
| 8300 | |
| 8301 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
| 8302 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
| 8303 | |
| 8304 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
| 8305 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
| 8306 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
| 8307 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
| 8308 version. | |
| 8309 | |
| 8310 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
| 8311 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
| 8312 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
| 8313 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
| 8314 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
| 8315 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
| 8316 | |
| 8317 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
| 8318 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
| 8319 systems with limited file name syntax. | |
| 8320 | |
| 8321 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
| 8322 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
| 8323 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
| 8324 completions.el: | |
| 8325 | |
| 8326 (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
| 8327 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
| 8328 "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
| 8329 | |
| 8330 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
| 8331 depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
| 8332 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
| 8333 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
| 8334 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
| 8335 | |
| 8336 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
| 8337 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
| 8338 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
| 8339 | |
| 8340 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
| 8341 marker from its buffer position. | |
| 8342 | |
| 8343 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
| 8344 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
| 8345 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
| 8346 | |
| 8347 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
| 8348 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
| 8349 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
| 8350 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
| 8351 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
| 8352 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
| 8353 | |
| 8354 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
| 8355 errors that happen often during editing. | |
| 8356 | |
| 8357 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
| 8358 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
| 8359 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
| 8360 | |
| 8361 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
| 8362 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
| 8363 | |
| 8364 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
| 8365 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
| 8366 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
| 8367 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
| 8368 and not get-buffer-window. | |
| 8369 | |
| 8370 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
| 8371 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
| 8372 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
| 8373 | |
| 8374 If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
| 8375 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
| 8376 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
| 8377 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
| 8378 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
| 8379 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
| 8380 over and over for the same text. | |
| 8381 | |
| 8382 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
| 8383 | |
| 8384 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
| 8385 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
| 8386 | |
| 8387 ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
| 8388 ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
| 8389 | |
| 8390 in addition to the normal | |
| 8391 | |
| 8392 ;; HEADER: text | |
| 8393 | |
| 8394 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
| 8395 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
| 8396 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
| 8397 | |
| 8398 * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
| 8399 | |
| 8400 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 8401 Copyright information: | |
| 8402 | |
| 27200 | 8403 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 25853 | 8404 |
| 8405 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
| 8406 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
| 8407 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
| 8408 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
| 8409 | |
| 8410 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
| 8411 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
| 8412 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
| 8413 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
| 8414 | |
| 8415 Local variables: | |
| 8416 mode: outline | |
| 8417 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
| 8418 end: |
